2008 Dakota

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 3
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 10
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of Consult the table of contents to determine which section
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with contains the information you desire.
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
complete listing of all subjects.
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- Consult the following table for a description of the
tions and recommendations in this manual will help symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. this owner’s manual:
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.

INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition
m Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
m Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . .20 m Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
m Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only) . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .40
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
Mode – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System m Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .68
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 2
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Restraint System (SRS) – Airbags . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
Automatic Transmission
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
the LOCK position, and remove the key.
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Switch Positions
Ignition Key
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily

in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the

CAUTION!
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is remove key from the ignition and lock all doors 2
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but when leaving the vehicle unattended.
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING! Manual Transmission—If Equipped

When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
ignition. A child could operate power windows, turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
other controls, or move the vehicle.

depress and hold the release button located between the Locking Doors With The Key
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni- You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
tion key to LOCK and remove the key. door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
Ignition Key Release Button grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2)
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the
engine.

NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also NOTE:

considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the • The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. with some after-market remote starting systems. Use
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob- 2
lems and loss of security protection.
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light • Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is any other transponder-equipped components on the
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light same key chain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of against the ignition key being used when starting the
these conditions will result in the engine being shut off vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
after two (2) seconds. will not cause interference with this system.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.

Replacement Keys authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-

gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
key is one, which has never been programmed.
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
CAUTION! dealer.
Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and Customer Key Programming
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new
sentry keys to the system by performing the following
procedure:
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided 1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
location. This number is required for dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least 3

seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
first key. cedure.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
2
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15 not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In for details.
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
have all remaining keys erased from the systems
position and remove the second key.
memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60 grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In the time of service to be reprogrammed.
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and
then turn off.

General Information If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering

The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 Wheel:
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
subject to the following conditions: down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engages.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
received, including interference that may cause undes-
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
ired operation.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED the right or left to disengage the lock.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with- the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.

Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System system is arming. The security light in the instrument
This system prevents the key from being removed unless panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds to
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate 2
the brake pedal is depressed. that the system is armed.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: If the security light stays on continuously during
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for vehicle operation, have the system checked by your
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the dealer.
system provides both audible and visual signals. The To Disarm the System:
horn will sound repeatedly for 3 minutes and the head- Use the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the
lights and security light in the instrument cluster will doors. If something has triggered the system in your
flash for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not
absence, the horn will sound three times when you
run until the system is disarmed.
unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
To Set the Alarm:
The security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks or
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro-
use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
all the doors are locked and closed, the security light in
will start and run for 2 seconds and then shut down.
the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine, the

system will shut down until the correct key is used. To ILLUMINATED ENTRY
exit alarming mode, press the transmitter Unlock button
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key.
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
The security alarm system is designed to protect your doors are unlocked using the key fob.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a key fob
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit.
LOCK button is pressed.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the security sys-
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
tem (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the vehicle
interior lights off after 8 minutes if the ignition is OFF
without using the key fob to unlock the door(s). The
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
security system can be disarmed with the key fob’s
interior lights ON position.
UNLOCK button or by inserting a programmed Sentry
Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON
position.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
2
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, and the parking lights will
flash on twice.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
key fob.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the panic alarm from distances a minimum of 66 2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio transmitter. The but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
the system. that this feature has changed.

3. Release both buttons at the same time. Horn Chirp Programming

The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the transmitter.
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated 2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button press the PANIC button within 6 seconds. A single chime
to deactivate the Security Alarm. will sound to indicate that this feature has changed.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to 3. Release both buttons at the same time.
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
To lock the doors:
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the ve-
Press and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock
hicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
removed.
will chirp once.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter,
while you are inside the vehicle, will activate the Security

Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated 4. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the
to deactivate the Security Alarm. transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position, and the
6. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
key removed. 2
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps. NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter,
while you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security
Flash Lamps with Lock Programming
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the transmit- will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
ter. to deactivate the Security Alarm.
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds, 5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
also press the LOCK button within 6 seconds. A single reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.

Using the Panic Alarm 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press received including interference that may cause undesired
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once. operation.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
and the horn will sound.
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During the Panic 1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry systems batteries is five years.
will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
security system on vehicles so equipped.
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
General Information or CB radios.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

Programming Additional Transmitters 4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with engine ).
two transmitters programmed only for that vehicle. A
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
total of eight transmitters can be programmed for your 2
vehicle. Additional transmitters can be programmed to 6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
fob.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob, all chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
other programmed transmitters will be erased and you program mode. All transmitters that are to be pro-
will have to reprogram them for your vehicle. grammed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the
chime was heard.
Use the following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key: 8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and hold both
the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously for 2
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
seconds and then release.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
9. Press and release the UNLOCK button a single chime
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
will be heard.
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.

10. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to program up to six additional flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
transmitters. Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
12. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed transmitters function nor-
mally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a inside of the battery clip, located on back cover. Avoid

touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly.
with rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
2
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test transmitter operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the
vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is
part of your ignition key.
Remote Start Transmitter
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, and all the Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
doors must be closed. minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START START button once.
button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To

The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate • The transmission is moved out of park
that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is
• The brake pedal is pressed.
running. The lamps will turn off when the ignition is
turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled. The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After
UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is
either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
unlocked, you have 15 minutes to enter the vehicle, insert
alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position,
must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto-
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.
matically turn off.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur: DOOR LOCKS
• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 Manual Door Locks

All the doors can be “manually” locked from the inside
• Any engine warning lamps come on by pushing down the door lock plunger, located on the
• The hood is opened door trim panel. Both front doors may be opened from
the inside with the door lock plunger in the down or
• The hazard switch is pressed locked position.

Power Door Locks

WARNING!
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
For personal security and safety in the event of an panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well 2
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
Power Door Lock Switch
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power

locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden- 2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A ming procedure).
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
3. Place the key into the ignition.
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
• The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position a
ignition.
minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position (do
Automatic Door Locks not start the engine)
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph
in the LOCK direction.
(24 km/h).
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
been disabled.
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure: 7. To re-activate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. 8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.

Auto Unlock On Exit Feature - If Equipped 4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when position to the ON position and back to LOCK position a
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position (do
has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle not start the engine). 2
has been driven (shifted out of Park and the doors
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
closed).
in the UNLOCK direction.
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
Customer Programming sequence to disable or enable:
been changed.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
any chiming that may be confusing during this program-
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
ming procedure).
the above procedure.
3. Insert the key into the ignition.

Child Protection Door Lock child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child- outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
protection door lock system. unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
Child Lock Lever NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.

WINDOWS windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON or ACC (Accessory) position and for ten
Power Windows
minutes after the ignition is turned off or the driver’s
door is opened. 2
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
Power Window Switch

The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The

Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)

The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again. Power Window Lock Out Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs

with the rear windows open, open the front and rear
WARNING!
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled 2
Some of the most important safety features in your
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, knee
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
bolsters, front airbags for both the driver and front
buckled up properly.
passenger, and if equipped left and right side curtain
airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a
window. If you will be carrying children too small for Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
(refer to the Child Restraint section in this manual), can and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. far away from home or on your own street.
Please pay close attention to the information in this Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
possible. thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

WARNING!
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Lap/Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
All seating positions except the front center seating riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
position (with full bench seat) have combination lap/ injured or killed.
shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
using a seat belt properly.
will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat adjust the seat.
belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
than one person, no matter what their size. seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch

plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
WARNING!
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap. • A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch • A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
allow the belt to retract fully. away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage release
button to release the anchorage, and then move it up or
WARNING! down to the position that serves you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode – If

Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in 2
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
it is locked in the desired position. the entire belt is extracted.
The adjuster has an easy up (EZ Up) feature, which will
allow it to be moved up without engaging the button.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will Seat Belt Pretensioners
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The seat belts for front outboard seating positions are
now in the automatic locking mode. equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
locking mode.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Center Lap Belts
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
The center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap
worn snugly and positioned properly.
belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against ers are single use items. After a collision that is severe
the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
as tightly as is comfortable. must be replaced.

Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
(BeltAlert) 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System 2
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning (BeltAlert).
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
buckle their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the seat
belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
will be heard and, the Enhanced Warning System for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
(BeltAlert) will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
belt is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
(BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
buckled.
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). 4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the pro-
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
gramming.
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:

The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti- Seat Belt Extender
vated by repeating this procedure. If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
tender and store it.
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible. recommended seating positions. Remove and store
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the the extender when not needed.
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.

Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in
Restraint System (SRS) – Airbags the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS/AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
2
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
1 - Airbags
2 - Knee Bolsters NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the

NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

WARNING!
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag proper performance of the window bags.
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
damage the airbags and you could be injured
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
because the airbags are no longer functional. These
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de- protection for the driver and front passenger. Window
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating. bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do
protection.
not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
block the location of the window bag. The area of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
where the window bag is located should remain
free from any obstructions. severe frontal collisions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do If your vehicle is so equipped, the window bag on the
not have any accessory items installed which will crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your severe side collisions. But even in collisions where the
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma- airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
right position for the airbags to protect you properly.
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.

Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize 2. All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. properly.
1. Children 12 years and under should always ride 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint. back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate.
2
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride 4. If your vehicle has window airbags, do not lean
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag. against the door or window, airbags will inflate forcefully
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to into the space between you and the door.
infants in that position.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the 9If
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child You Need Customer Assistance9 section later in this
restraint. See 9Child Restraint9 in this section. owner’s manual.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

Air Bag System Components

WARNING!
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more • Occupant Restraint Controller
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Side Remote Acceleration Sensors – If Equipped
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all. • Airbag Warning Light
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags. • Driver Airbag
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Passenger Airbag

panel during airbag deployment could cause seri- • Window Bags above Side Windows – If Equipped
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the • Steering Wheel and Column
steering wheel or instrument panel. • Instrument Panel
• If the vehicle has window bags, they also need • Interconnecting Wiring
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners

How the Airbag System Works Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
light in the instrument cluster for 6 to 8 seconds
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
for a self-check when the ignition is first turned
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning 2
light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
part of the system, it turns on the AIRBAG warning light
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
detect roll over.
sound if the light comes on again after initial start up.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in WARNING!
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and Ignoring the AIRBAG warning light in your instru-
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
the airbags are not on and will not inflate. on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC may away.
deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.

NOTE: Children 12 years and under should always ride through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint. way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right • The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a activate only in certain side collisions. When the ORC
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator (with side impact option) detects a collision requiring
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to the window bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas
may be possible based on collision severity and occu- is generated to inflate the window bag. The inflating
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. forcefully inflates in about one quarter of the time it
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds. takes to blink your eye. Make sure you are seated and
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. belted properly and do not position items in the area
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain where the window bag inflates. This especially applies
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front to children. The window bag is only about 3-1/2
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of inches (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented

NOTE: At no time should any supplemental restraint If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
system (SRS) component or SRS related component or or all of the following may occur:
fastener be modified or replaced with any part except
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
2
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
the driver and the front passenger, and position every- abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
one for the best interaction with the front airbag. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
If A Deployment Occurs
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
when the impact sensors detect a moderate-to-severe
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
frontal collision, to help restrain the driver and front
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
system. or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the

irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles Maintaining Your Airbag System
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning. WARNING!
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the • Modifications to any part of the airbag system
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you. be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
WARNING! wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags, modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
and both front seat belt retractor assemblies (w/ or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
pretensioners), replaced by an authorized dealer as
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
soon as possible.
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap- • The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. interval.
Enhanced Accident Response System • The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical driving.
2
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod-
approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse
switch is turned off.
block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the
Airbag Light inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses.
You will want to have the airbags ready to See your dealer if the fuse is good.
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during the moment of airbag deployment, and up to a quarter
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or
turned on.

after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
an airbag deploys, and are otherwise unavailable. the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
NOTE: Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com- provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor- ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern- data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as Corporation to any third party except when:
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
insurance organizations.
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), preserved
the company or its designated representative will first

2. Used in defense of litigation involving a • Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)

DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
• Transmission gear selection 2
4. Otherwise required by law
• Cruise control status
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Traction/stability control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped)
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
time - babies and children, too. Every state in the United
cycles and vehicle mileage)
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12
• Impact acceleration and angle
years and under should ride properly buckled up in a
• Seatbelt status rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
children from newborn size to the child almost large less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat held in the vehicle by the seatbelt or the LATCH child
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child: Seat Anchorage System section.)
Infants and Small Children • Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off. An
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
to infants in this position.
of child restraints can be used rearward facing: infant
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Older Children and Child Restraints
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the • Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than older than one year old. These child seats are also held
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing

in the vehicle by the seatbelt or the LATCH child • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
restraint anchorage system. (See the LATCH - Child
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
Seat Anchorage System section.)
as possible.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
2
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
slouching can move the belt out of position.
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
• Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.

Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you

WARNING!
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an use it before you buy it.
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a • The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
collision. The child could be badly injured or weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- weight and height limits.
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
• A rearward facing infant restraint should only be restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have not work when you need it.
an airbag off switch. A rearward facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a • The Extended Cab first and Club/Crew Cab second
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se- row outside seating positions have cinching latch
vere or fatal to the infant. plates. These are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
restraint: lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH-
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. compatible child restraint systems are now available.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be intro-
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
duced over a period of years, child restraint systems 2
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail-
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs able for some time. For some older child restraints, many
and cause serious personal injury. child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
the available attachments provided with your child re-
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) — If Equipped
straint in any vehicle.
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Extended Cab
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
• The Extended Cab front and right rear (if equipped
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
with a rear seat) passenger seating positions have
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
lower anchorages for LATCH equipped child re-
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
straints.

Crew Cab If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible, you
can only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s
• The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
seat belts. Please refer to the next section for typical
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-
installation instructions.
compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-
mounted lower attachments at all three seating posi-
tions. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless
of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear
seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but
you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position.

seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear

of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back, and are
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your 2
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages each LATCH seating position (see section on
Child Restraint Tether Anchor). Many, but not all re-
straint systems will be equipped with separate straps on
each side, with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of
adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also
System — If Equipped be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
child restraint systems will be installed as described here. the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear anchorages. Next attach the lower hooks or connectors

over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
cover material. Then attach the tether strap to the anchor- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
age located on the back of the seat, being careful to route child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
the tether strap to provide the most direct path between stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
the anchor and the child restraint. If your vehicle is Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
head restraint and, route the tether strap under the head your child unattended in the vehicle.
restraint and between the two posts. Finally, tighten all
three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and WARNING!
downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- Improper installation of a child restraint to the
tions. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts when installing an infant or child restraint.
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat locking retractor seat belts, refer to 9Automatic Locking
Belt Mode9 earlier in this section. If you have trouble tighten-
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because
ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path 2
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child opening on the restraint, follow these steps. If the buckle
restraint so that it should not be necessary to use a is webbing mounted, disconnect the latch plate from the
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to shorten it.
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, the
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will buckle is not webbing mounted, or if by pulling and
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
it tight if necessary. If the seat belt has an automatic to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
locking retractor, it will have a distinctive label. Pull the the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert the
belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make
to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch the child restraint secure, try a different seating position
plate into the buckle. Then, pull the belt until it is all or use the locking clip provided with your child restraint.
extracted from the retractor. Allow the belt to return to See the section 9Child Restraint Tether Anchor9 to com-
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the plete the child seat installation.
lap portion about the child restraint. For automatic

Child Restraint Tether Anchor

WARNING!
The Extended Cab model has one routing strap
located behind the passenger side rear out- With a child restraint installed in the rear passenger
board seating position. The tether anchor itself side locations, use care when adjusting the front
is located in the center of vehicle, in between seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seat back coming
the two seating positions. The front outboard passenger in contact with the belted child directly behind the
seating position is also equipped with a child tether seat. The child could be injured.
anchorage, located at the base of the front seat back.
When there is a rear seat delete option, the tether
anchorage located on the cab back panel is designed to be
used for the front seat center seating position. The Crew WARNING!
Cab model has three anchorages located behind each of
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
the rear seating positions (rear left, rear center, and rear
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
right).
The child could be seriously injured or killed. Make
sure the child restraint tether strap is always routed
through the proper anchor strap inner loop.

Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Extended Cab) Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Extended Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the 1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
front passenger seat back and under the head restraint. routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
2
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor.
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled
tight.

2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Crew Cab)
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
positions.
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material
loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two Anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor

strap is pulled tight.

Multiple Child Restraints

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
positions directly behind the child restraint to secure Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
a child restraint top tether strap. See your dealer for
help if necessary. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality, energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
Transporting Pets conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly shown in Section 7.
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in MUST NEVER BE USED.
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few • It may be necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the engine running for more than a short period. If so,
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty. adjust your climate control system to force outside air
into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the 2
SAFETY TIPS controls in any position except OFF or RECIRC.
Exhaust System • The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
WARNING! exhaust system.
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an ex- Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
tremely toxic gas that by itself is colorless and exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
odorless. To avoid inhaling these gases, the following the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
precautions should be observed: mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
or out of the area. each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Airbag Light

Vehicle The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Heater Defroster Ducts
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
there are any question regarding the operation of your
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
seatbelt light will flash.
authorized dealer
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Seat Belts
Vehicle
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Tires
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
the tread.
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
belt.

Lights Fluid Leaks

Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
panel. detected the cause should be located and corrected. 2
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ UConnectt System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnectt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . .77 m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
m Hands–Free Communication (UConnectt) — If ▫ Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ 6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Side Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat . . . . . . . . 110
m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 121
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 114
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada – Standard
And US Fleet Vehicles – If Equipped) . . . . . . . 115 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 130
m Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 ▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3
m Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . . 126 ▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 m Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Programming HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 136
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Using HomeLinkt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkt Button . . 137
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Rear Window Defroster – If Equipped . . . . . . . 145

m Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 ▫ Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off m Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
(Battery Fed Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
m Floor Console — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Two Position Tailgate / Upper
▫ Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Load Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
m Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . . 141 m Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
m Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 m Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
m Rear Storage – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Rear Convenience Storage Crates . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . 151
m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control under the mirror to the night position
Inside Day/Night Mirror
(toward rear of truck). The mirror should be adjusted
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
through the rear window. A two-point pivot system
allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the Outside Mirrors
mirror. To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
3
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage.
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left

or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

UConnectt is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle

WARNING!
communications system. UConnectt allows you to dial a
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side phone number with your cellular phone using simple
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial”
than they really are. Relying too much on your right { “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
side mirror could cause you to collide with another mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system 3
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when will automatically mute your radio when using the
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the UConnectt system.
right side mirror. NOTE: The UConnectt system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See UConnectt website for sup-
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnectT) — ported phones.
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: For UConnectt customer support, visit the
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an inte- following web sites:
grated Hands-Free Communication (UConnectt) sys-
tem. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for • www.chrysler.com/uconnect
UConnectt system operating instructions for this radio. • www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect

• or call 1–877–855–8400 Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
UConnectt allows you to transfer calls between the
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro- Phone Button
phone for private conversation. The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
The UConnectt phone book enables you to store up to 32
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
separate 32-name phone book accessible only in that
(Phone Button and Voice Recognition Button) that will
language. This system is driven through your
enable you to access the system.
Bluetooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone.
UConnectt features Bluetooth™ technology - the global Voice Recognition Button
standard that enables different electronic devices to con- Actual button location may vary with radio.
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so The individual buttons are described in the
UConnectt works no matter where you stow your cellu- “Operation” section.
lar phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long
as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the The UConnectt system can be used with any Hands-Free
vehicle’s UConnectt system. The UConnectt system Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system. UConnectt website for supported phones. If your cellular

phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile) • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
you may not be able to use any UConnectt features. Refer the beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt or another
to your cellular service provider or the phone manufac- prompt.
turer for details.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
The UConnectt system is fully integrated with the vehi- used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnectt system 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
3
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
switch), if so equipped.
combined form of the voice command is given. You
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from can also break the commands into parts and say each
the UConnectt system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
certain radios. example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
Operation
combined form command into two voice commands:
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnectt
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
system and to navigate through the UConnectt menu struc-
UConnectt system works best when you talk in a
ture. Voice commands are required after most UConnectt
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
system prompts. You will be prompted for a specific com-
sitting eight feet away from you.
mand and then guided through the available options.

Voice Command Tree To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. The
UConnectt website may also provide detailed instruc-
Help Command
tions for pairing.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following The following are general phone to UConnectt System
the beep. The UConnectt system will play all the options pairing instructions:
at any prompt if you ask for help.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
To activate the UConnectt system from idle, simply press
the “Phone” button and follow audible prompts for • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
directions. All UConnectt system sessions begin with a 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
press of the “Phone” button on the radio control head.
• When prompted, after the beep, say 9Pair a Phone9 and
Cancel Command follow the audible prompts.
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say 9Cancel9 and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
few instances the system will take you back to the which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
previous menu. You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
Pair (Link) UConnectt System to a Cellular Phone
pairing process.
To begin using your UConnectt system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.

• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial by Saying a Number

give the UConnectt system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest • System will prompt you to say the number you want
3
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to call.
your UConnectt system. However, at any given time,
• For example, you can say 9234-567-8901.9 The phone
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
number that you enter must be of valid length and
your UConnectt System. The priority allows the
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
UConnectt system to know which cellular phone to
hicle was purchased, the UConnectt limits the user
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnectt
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
valid phone number has ten digits.
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone • The UConnectt system will confirm the phone num-
Connectivity9). ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your UConnectt Phonebook

• Press the “Phone” button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to phone book is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.9 • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• System will prompt you to say the name of the person • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
you want call. 9Phonebook New Entry.9
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example, long names helps the voice recognition and it is
you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ- recommended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or
ously stored name entry in the UConnectt phone 9Robert9 instead of 9Bob.9
book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnectt Phone-
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
book,9 to learn how to store a name in the phone book.
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
• The UConnectt system will confirm the name and you to store multiple numbers for each phone book
then dial the corresponding phone number, which entry, if desired.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phone book entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone owners’
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more manual for specific instructions on how to send these
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the entries from your phone.
main menu.
NOTE:
The UConnectt system will allow you to enter up to 32 • Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX trans-
names in the phone book with each name having up to fers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
3
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
language has a separate 32-name phone book accessible
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth,
only in that language.
and you may see a message on the phone display that
Phonebook Download the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
UConnectt allows the user to download entries from first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the the UConnectt and then send the address book entry
“Phone” button and say “Phonebook Download.” Sys- via Bluetooth. Please see your phone owners’ manual
tem prompts “Ready to accept vcard entry via for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth
Bluetooth…” The system is now ready to accept phone- connection.
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it
will be use only the first 24 characters.

Edit Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook 9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
NOTE: Editing names in the phone book is recom-
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mended when vehicle is not in motion.
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say Delete Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook
9Phonebook Edit.9
NOTE: Editing phone book entries is recommended
• You will then be asked for the name of the phone book when vehicle is not in motion.
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
9Phonebook Delete.9
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
phone book entry that you are editing.
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book, to delete. You can either say the name of a phone book
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phone book
return to the main menu. from which you choose. To select one of the entries

from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button • After confirmation, the phone book entries will be
while the UConnectt system is playing the desired deleted.
entry and say 9Delete.9
• Note that only the phone book in the current language
• After you enter the name, the UConnectt system will is deleted.
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
List All Names in the UConnectt Phonebook 3
wish to delete. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• Note that only the phone book entry in the current • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
language is deleted. 9Phonebook List Names.9
Delete All Entries in the UConnectt Phonebook • The UConnectt system will play the names of all the
phone book entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
9Phonebook Erase All.9
name, and say 9Call.9
• The UConnectt system will ask you to verify that you
NOTE: The user can also exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
operations at this point.

• The UConnectt system will then prompt you as to the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
number designation you wish to call. single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
• The selected number will be dialed. Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
Phone Call Features
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
The following features can be accessed through the
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
UConnectt system if the feature(s) are available on your
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
on hold and answer the incoming call.
accessed through the UConnectt system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you NOTE: The UConnectt system compatible phones in
have. market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the Making a Second Call while Current Call in
UConnectt system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Progress
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
call. Press ’Phone’ button to accept the call. To reject the press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phone book

entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while Conference Call
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
refer to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, hold), press and hold the “Phone” button until you hear
refer to 9Conference Call.9 a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you Three-Way Calling
3
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the tion” button while a call is in progress and make a second
“Phone” button until you hear a single beep. phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
Toggling Between Calls
established, press and hold the “Phone” button until you
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
press the “Phone” button until you hear a single beep
been joined into one conference call.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one Call Termination
time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone”
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on

hold may not become active automatically. This is cell switched to off. Call continuation functionality available
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
and hold the “Phone” button until you hear a single
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
beep.
on the UConnectt system either until the call ends or
Redial until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnectt system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
9Redial.9
on the UConnectt system for certain duration, after
• The UConnectt system will call the last number that which the call is automatically transferred from the
was dialed on your cellular phone. UConnectt system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the • An active call is automatically transferred to the
UConnectt system. mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnectt system after the vehicle ignition key has been

UConnectT System Features Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the UConnectt system is
using, • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. 3
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnectt system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Emergency9 and the UConnectt system will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
voice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE: After every UConnectt language change opera-
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
tion, only the language specific 32-name phone book is
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
and usable across all languages.
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.

The UConnectt system does slightly lower your chances Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
phone directly. the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Paging
UConnectt system to allow use of this vehicle feature in To learn how to page refer to 9Working with Automated
emergency situations when the cell phone has network Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
coverage and stays paired to the UConnectt system. certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnectt system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
with Automated Systems.9
Working with Automated Systems
9Towing Assistance.9
This method is used in instances where one generally has
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800- navigating through an automated telephone system.
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
You can use your UConnectt system to access a voice-
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
City in Mexico).

service or automated customer service. Some services say “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
require immediate response selection, in some instances, name or number, say the name of the phonebook entry
that may be too quick for use of UConnectt system. you wish to send. The UConnectt will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phone-
When calling a number with your UConnectt system
book entry as tones over the phone.
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push NOTE:
3
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you • You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example, network configurations, this is normal.
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
• Some paging and voicemail systems have system
pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the “Voice Recognition”
timeout settings too short that may not allow the use
button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or
of this feature.
sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service Barge In - Overriding Prompts
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
You can also send stored UConnectt phonebook entries
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
as tones for fast and easy access to voicemail and pager
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and

a{,9 you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and status when you are attempting to make a phone call
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to using UConnectt. The status is given for roaming, net-
listen to the rest of the voice prompt. work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnectt sys- keypad and still use the UConnectt system (while dial-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnectt system will audio system. The UConnectt system will work the same
play the current confirmation prompt status and you as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
will be given the choice to change it.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
Phone and Network Status Indicators dial ring to the UConnectt system to play it on the
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
your cell phone, the UConnectt system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network

may feel that the call did not go through even though the Advanced Phone Connectivity
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
hear the audio.
The UConnectt system allows on going calls to be
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off) transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnectt
When you mute the UConnectt system, you will still be system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
able to hear the conversation coming from the other ing call from your UConnectt paired cellular phone to
3
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In the UConnectt system or vice-versa, press the “Voice
order to mute the UConnectt system: Recognition” button and say 9Transfer Call.9
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button. Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnectt System and Cellular Phone
• Following the beep, say 9Mute.9
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
In order to un-mute the UConnectt system: electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9
with one electronic device at a time.
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
• Following the beep, say 9Mute-off.9
Bluetooth™ connection between a UConnectt paired
cellular phone and the UConnectt system, then follow
the instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
the phone that you wish to select.
• When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
• The UConnectt system will play the phone names of call. If the selected phone is not available, the
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to UConnectt system will return to using the highest
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired priority phone present in or near (approximately
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni- within 30 feet) the vehicle.
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
Delete UConnectt Paired Cellular Phones
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Select another Cellular Phone • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
This feature allows you to select and start using another 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
phone paired with the UConnectt system.
• At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
• Press the “Phone” button to begin. prompts.

• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button • Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say 9Setup,
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose Voice Training9 command.
the phone you wish to delete.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
Things You Should Know About Your UConnectT UConnectt system. For best results, the Voice Training
System session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
3
UConnectt Tutorial
switched off.
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
“Phone” button and say “UConnectt Tutorial.” This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnectt settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this procedure and follow the prompts.
training mode, follow one of the two procedures:
Voice Recognition (VR)
From outside the UConnectt mode (e.g. from radio
• For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to
mode)
provide at least 1⁄2 inch (1 cm) gap between the
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for 5 overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
seconds until the session begins, or,

• Always wait for the beep before speaking. • Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
cents, the system may not always work for some.
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you. • When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9Send.9
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in phone book when vehicle is not in
• Performance is maximized under:
motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, names in the UConnectt phone book.
• low road noise, • UConnectt phone book nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the person who stored the name in the
• smooth road surface,
phone book.
• fully closed windows,
• You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
• dry weather condition. spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9

• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported. not the UConnectt system.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
compromised with the convertible top down. the in-vehicle audio volume.
3
Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth Communication Link
• low-to-medium blower setting,
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, the UConnectt system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
• low road noise,
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
• smooth road surface, in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
• fully closed windows, and Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
• dry weather condition.
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
• operation from driver seat. wait at least five (5) seconds prior to using the system.




Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts. 3
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language redial
list names return to main menu return or main menu
list phones select phone select
mobile send
mute set up phone settings or phone
mute off set up
new entry towing assistance
no transfer call
pager UConnectt Tutorial
pair a phone try again
phone pairing pairing voice training
phonebook phone book work
previous yes
record again

General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
3
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
SEATS
Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners

The front seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining
mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner 3
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If

Equipped
The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar Positions
support. Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.

To lower the head restraint, depress the release button

located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster — Driver’s Side Only

The 6-way power seat adjuster switches are on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat. Use this switch to
move the seat up or down, forward or rearward, or tilt. Power Seat Control Location

The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the

driver’s seat cushion. Three switches control the seat
movement. The four-way switch in the center can be
moved forward or backwards to get the most comfortable
position. The same switch can be moved up and down to
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the 3
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
Tilt Adjustment

Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat heat level. Flashing indicator lights on the switch indicate
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear that the Heated Seat system needs servicing.
seat cushion.
WARNING!
The Crew Cab rear seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full
back. Either cushion can be raised independently. Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
Heated Seats — If Equipped because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
The heated seat switches are located on the center of the spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
instrument panel. tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
Press the desired switch once to obtain High heat level, at low temperatures, especially if used for long
then press the switch again to obtain Low heat level. A periods of time.
third button press will turn Off the heated seat. If you do
not purposefully turn the switch Off, the seat heating Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
level will automatically change to the next lower level, or against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
Off. The High heat level operates for 30 minutes (ap- cause the seat heater to overheat.
proximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 minutes
(approximate). The heated seat will also turn Off when
the ignition is turned Off. Both indicators On identifies
High heat level. The lower indicator On identifies Low

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Then push the safety latch lever up while lifting the grille
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull with your right hand. It is located at the bottom center of
the hood release lever located under the left side of the the grille.
instrument panel.
Lift the hood and gas filled props will hold it open.
3
Hood Release Lever Location

Secondary Latch Location

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to LIGHTS

close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before
driving.

Interior Lights control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the
9Party9 mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
cle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
3
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re-
quired during the day. If the dimmer control is not in this
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
position, the audio display may be difficult to read if the
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
headlights are on during the daytime.
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the Club Cab/Quad Cab models may have an optional
UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob.When a door switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer the lens.

Battery Saver Headlamp Delay

To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed- To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights. headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 60
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 15
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
the headlamp switch is cycled off. The headlamps will
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
remain on for 60 seconds. Headlamp delay can be
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON then
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8 OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
automatically turn off.
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is lights, license plate light and instrument panel
ON. lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
3
Daytime Running Lights (Canada – Standard and
US Fleet Vehicles – If Equipped)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started, the transmission is out of the PARK
position and the parking brake is released. This provides
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses a constant 9Lights ON9 condition until the ignition is
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than normal
than glass headlights. intensity. If the parking brake is applied or the transmis-
sion is in the park position, the Daytime Running Lights
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
will turn off.
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

Lights-on Reminder CARGO Light — If Equipped

If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the head-
light rotary control in the parking light or head-
light position and pressing on the headlight rotary
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights
will turn off when the switch is pressed a second time,
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the
also when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF
CARGO button. The interior lights will also turn on
position, or the high beam is selected.
when the cargo lights are on. The cargo lights will also
turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob Unlock is pressed,
as part of the illuminated entry feature.

Multifunction Control Lever The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the steering column. of the front and rear turn signal lights. If an indicator fails
to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that
Turn Signals
the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the
3
turn signal system, the arrow indicators will flash at a
faster rate.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
NOTE: If a turn signal has been left on for at least a mile
duration, a continuous chime will sound.
Turn Signal Auto-Mode
Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
turn off.
left-hand turn.

Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.

Windshield Wipers with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For

maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
3
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the could lead to an accident. You might not see other
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
select the desired wiper speed. the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
Intermittent Wiper System windshield with defroster before and during wind-
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for shield washer use.
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,

NOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
is turned off, the wiper will automatically return to the in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
9Park9 position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
will resume operation. rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end TILT STEERING COLUMN
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the in place.
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.

WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve- 3
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
Tilt Steering Column Lever
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.

To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control with-
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System has been out erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the
buttons (i.e. SET and CANCEL) are operated simulta- memory.
neously in order to ensure proper operation. The system
can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch
ON/OFF button and re-establishing the desired vehicle
SET speed.

Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed

WARNING!
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to increases so that tapping the button three times will
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose increase speed by three increments.
control and have an accident. Always leave the sys- Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
3
tem OFF when you aren’t using it. decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
To Resume Speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific your specific engine).
engine). To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
To Vary The Speed Setting and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.

Functions All Engines

Engage Speed 30 mph (48 km/h)
Minimun RESUME Speed 25 mph (40 km/h)
ACCEL Increase 2 mph (3km/h)
DECEL Decrease 1 mph (2 km/h)
Dropout Speed 25 mph (40 km/h)
To Accelerate For Passing Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im-
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
at the end of the gear shifter.
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this hap-
pens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE
WARNING!
The overhead console has the following features:
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use 3
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
• Courtesy Lights
• Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped

Courtesy/Reading Lights COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER

Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
lights. temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
monitored.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the US/M Button
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless measurement units.
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 8 minutes.

RESET Button Global Reset

If the RESET button and STEP button are pressed at the
same time and held for 3 seconds the Global Reset feature
will reset the distance to empty (using a default fuel
economy value), fuel economy, trip odometer, and
elapsed time displays. 3
Use this button to reset the following displays:

• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Odometer
• Elapsed time.

Step Button Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This
display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous
changes in fuel consumption as the number of total
vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested
that this mode be reset periodically for general operation
or when driving conditions change significantly (for
example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is
connected or disconnected).
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
conditions.
tank level.
When Distance To Empty = LOW FUEL, the fuel gauge
pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this
point (fuel gauge pointer on the the red “E” marker) there

is reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi- C/T Button

mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to
3
zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem-
since the last reset.
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.

Compass/Temperature Display After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal
WARNING! or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the
compass will function normally.
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly Manual Compass Calibration
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per- sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
sonal injury or property damage. ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
Automatic Compass Calibration not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the “Calibration” mode.
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.

To Put Into a Calibration Mode

Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
bol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area 3
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
Compass Variance Map

To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the HomeLinkt replaces up to three remote controls (hand
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari- held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
button to select the new variance zone and press the systems. The HomeLinkt unit operates off of your vehi-
RESET button to resume normal operation. cle’s battery.
Outside Temperature NOTE: HomeLinkt is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un- Alarm is active.
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.

WARNING! WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do not train ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage ous injury or death. 3
door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured after Programming HomeLinkT
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these Before You Begin
safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) illuminates
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information the HomeLinkt symbol (a house with an arrow inside it)
or assistance. along with 1, 2 or 3 indicators under it when a
HomeLinkt button is pressed.
Pay attention to the indicator(s), as they will flash at
different rates, or remain solid during training.
If you have not trained any of the HomeLinkt buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
seconds. Release the buttons when the indicators start to HomeLinktbutton and the hand-held transmitter button
flash. until the indicator(s) change from a slow to a rapid flash
rate.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed Then release both the HomeLinkt and hand-held trans-
to HomeLinkt for more efficient training and accurate mitter buttons.
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage garage door may open & close while you train.
while training.
If the signal is too weak to train, replace the battery in the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. original hand-held transmitter.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (3–8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLinktbuttons while keeping the may require you to replace Step #3 with procedures
HomeLinktdisplay in view. noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming”
section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand-
held transmitter away from the HomeLinkt.

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLinkt button. If

the indicator(s) blink rapidly for two seconds and then
remains constant, continue with next section: Program-
ming A Rolling Code System.
NOTE: After training a HomeLinkt channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLinkt and the
3
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button. 1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is 6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
NOT the button normally used to open & close the door). button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.

7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
HomeLinkt button twice (holding the button for 2 sec- designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
onds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
programming is complete.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
If the device does not activate, press the button a third door or gate motor.
time (for 2 seconds) to complete the training.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
If you are have any problems, or require assistance, opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLinktbutton
To program the remaining two HomeLinkt buttons, while you press and release - every two seconds
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until
erase the channels. HomeLinkthas successfully accepted the frequency
signal. The indicator(s) will change from a slow to
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
rapid flash when trained.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
transmission – which may not be long enough for at this time.
HomeLinkt to pick up the signal during programming.

Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with PRO-
HomeLink.” earlier in this section. GRAMMING HOMELINK Step #2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Using HomeLinkT
To operate, simply press and release the programmed Security
HomeLinkt button. Activation will now occur for the It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, in your vehicle.
3
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
seconds until the indicators begin to flash. Note that all
used at any time.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkT Button erased.
To re-program a channel that has been previously
The HomeLinkt Universal Transceiver is disabled when
trained, follow these steps:
the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Troubleshooting Tips
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLinktbutton for 20 If you are having trouble programming HomeLinkt, here
seconds until the indicator(s) starts to flash. Do not are some of the most common solutions:
release the button.
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

• Press the Learn Button on the Garage Door Opener to NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
complete the training for Rolling Code. with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
to plug it back in?
device.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num-
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
cations were met.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following This vehicle has two 12V auxiliary power outlets that can
two conditions: provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de-
signed for use with standard power outlet adapters. The
1. This device may not cause harmful interference outlets are located in the instrument panel, below the
2. This device must accept any interference that may be temperature control setting knob, and the other inside the
received including interference that may cause undesired full - size center console. When the optional Cigar Lighter
operation heating element is used, it heats when pushed in and

pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the (Battery Fed Configuration)
heating position.
CAUTION!
The instrument panel outlet can be reconfigured by the
customer to operate only when the ignition is On (switch
battery fed) or with the ignition switch On/Off (battery
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw 3
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
fed) to allow for cellular phone charging and/or opera- use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
tion while the ignition is Off. This can be done by moving plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
the power outlet (switchable) fuse (fuse #22) from the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
inboard position to the outboard position. and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
NOTE: All accessories connected to these outlets should
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use battery even more quickly. Use these only inter-
to protect the battery against discharge (unless the cus- mittently and with greater caution.
tomer has reconfigured the fuse block to switched battery
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
feed). long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

FLOOR CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED Storage Compartments

Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cup
Floor Console Features
holders are both removable and dishwasher safe for
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front pas-
cleaning purposes (upper rack of dishwasher only). Vari-
senger’s seat has the following features:
ous storage compartments provide versatile and useful
• Miscellaneous storage compartments storage. A coin holder is also provided inside the driver
side storage bin.
• 3 cup holders (2 are removable)
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
• iPod/Phone storage bin
The console is equipped with a power outlet and an
• 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment iPod/ phone storage bin. The phone storage bin can be
used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the
• Side open armrest lid
power outlet inside console compartment can be used to
• Tissue holder & 2 pen holders charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin. The
power outlet may be used for any portable item with a
• Coin slots
standard 12 volt power plug.
The coin slots are located under the instrument panel
Side Open Armrest Lid
center stack.
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open

until armrest lid is closed manually by pressing the lid CUP HOLDERS
back into place. Two pen holders are provided on the If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
inside of the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided there are three cup holders located on the console. Refer
on the inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket size to the section on floor console.
soft pack of tissue.
A two-cavity cup holder is available on all Crew Cab
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
3
CENTER STORAGE COMPARTMENT — IF
EQUIPPED
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the armrest to raise the lid. Compart-
ments include a holder which will accommodate five
compact disks with finger notches for easier access, a
pencil tray, a coin holder, and a large open area for
miscellaneous items.
Front Cup Holders – Crew Cab with Automatic

REAR STORAGE – IF EQUIPPED

Rear Convenience Storage Crates
WARNING!
Do not sit or stand on this crate. It may collapse

causing serious injury.
The rear convenience storage crates are located under the

rear seat lower cushion and consist of two removable,
collapsible storage crates.
Rear Cup Holders – Crew Cab with Automatic

CAUTION!
Do not lift up on the “End Flaps” to open the crate,

damage to the “End Flaps” may occur.
3
NOTE: The maximum loading capacity for the 40%
crate is 30 lbs. and 50 lbs. for the 60% crate.
To open the storage crate, lift upwards on the crate
handles, and engage the crate end flaps.
To remove the crate, press on the release lever and lift up
Open Crate on the crate.
1 - Crate Handles
2 - Crate End Flaps
3 - Release Lever

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab.
Insert Crate
To install the crate into the base, insert the crate into the
inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the
crate and snap into place. Grocery Bag Retainers
To collapse the crate, push the crate end flaps inward to
disengage. Push the sides inward and snap into the base.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES A push-button type switch is located on the right

side of the control below the A/C (Snowflake)
Rear Window Defroster – If Equipped
button. Pressing the switch will turn on the Rear Window
Defroster. A light above the Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!
symbol will illuminate to indicate the Rear Window
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Defroster is On. Pushing the button again will turn the 3
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft Rear Window Defroster Off prior to the time-out. The
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to Rear Window Defroster will turn off automatically after
the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe 15 minutes after the first push, 10 minutes after the
distance from the window to prevent damaging the second push all within the same ignition cycle. To
heating elements. prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear defroster
only when the engine is running.

Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped TAILGATE

Tailgate Removal
To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle.
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45° angle.
Sliding Rear Window Latch

A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45° angle and insert it into the

passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
Two Position Tailgate / Upper Load Platform
Your tailgate can be opened to the full open or the partial 3
open position. The partial open position is for loading
objects longer than the length of the bed (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by creating an upper load platform:
1. Install lumber
• Place lumber across the box in the indentations
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side provided above the wheel housings and in the
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time. bulkhead dividers to form the floor. There are
indents in the sheet metal (or bed liner if equipped)
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
on the inner side of the box in front (Club Cab only)
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
and behind both wheel housings.
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.

2. Secure the tailgate in the partially open position: To return the tailgate to the full open position:
• Open the tailgate slightly. • Lift up on the tailgate.
• Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable • Remove both cables from between the cable guides
guide and the tailgate bumper. Do this on both sides and the tailgate bumpers and lower the tailgate.
of the tailgate.

REAR CARGO AREA UTILITY RAILS

CAUTION!
• Care should always be exercised when operating a CAUTION!

vehicle with cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 320
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in
lbs (145 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat 3
should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal, or
vehicle damage.
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
• Insure the load is securely tied down and is
properly identified according to local laws if it
extends beyond the taillamps. There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist
in securing cargo. Each cleat must be located and tight-
• LOADING should not exceed 400 lbs (181 kg) of
ened down in one of the detentes, located on either rail,
material suspended above the wheelhouse and
in order to keep cargo properly secure.
partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may
result. To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
Utility Rail
1 - Utility Rail Cleat
2 - Cleat Retainer Nut
3 - Utility Rail Detent
Utility Rail End Cap

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate

can be removed. Unlatch tailgate and remove support
Camper Applications
cables from the retainer pins. Raise right side of tailgate
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
until the lower right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
Then slide the tailgate to the right to remove.
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing document located in your Owner’s Manual packet or Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped
3
available from your dealer. For safety reasons, follow all With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
instructions on this important document. To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
General Information
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
modifications and special equipment, such as a camper
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than the manufacturer. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the appli-
cable manufacturer.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 ▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
m Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
m Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 m Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 170
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 181
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 181

154 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
m Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free

And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) . . 199
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 183
m Satellite Radio (RSC) — If Equipped
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD (RER/REQ/REN Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 190
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
m Sales Code RER — Multimedia System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 ▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 203
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 199 ▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 155
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 209
System (VES™) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
m Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 206
▫ Air Conditioning And Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operation Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
m Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 4
m Sound Box Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1 — Headlight Switch 6 — Glove Box 11 — Transfer Case Switch*

2 — Air Outlets 7 — Radio 12 — Speed Control Switches
3 — Demister Outlets 8 — Climate Controls 13 — Hood Release
4 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Airbags 10 — Heated Seat Switches* * If Equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION

CAUTION!
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en-
ignition switch is in the ON position. gine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when
range indicates that the cooling system is operat- the engine is turned off. It will return to a true reading
ing satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a when the engine is restarted.
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
3. Turn Signal Indicators
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark, stop the
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase engine speed
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
for 2-3 minutes. If the temperature reading does not
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
return to normal, seek authorized service immediately.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the

left/right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM 7. Coolant Temperature Light
vehicle speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
than one mile. tion. For a bulb check, this light will come on
momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If the
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shift into N
This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1/8
(Neutral) and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3
of a tank or less. There is a pointer on the side of
minutes. If the temperature reading does not return to
this symbol that indicates the side that your fuel 4
normal, seek authorized service immediately.
filler door is located.
5. High Beam Indicator CAUTION!
Indicates that headlights are on high beam.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
This light comes on for several seconds after the
in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
ignition is turned ON as a reminder to “buckle
the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
up.” This light will remain on as long as the seat
engine off immediately, and call for service.
belt remains unbuckled. If this light flashes, it indicates a
fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.

10. Security Light

WARNING!
This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set.
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your The security light will also come on for about three
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the seconds when the ignition is first turned on.
hood yourself, see Section 7 of this manual. Follow 11. ABS Warning Light
the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
paragraph. which is described elsewhere in this manual.
This light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
8. Speedometer approximately 3 seconds. If this light remains on or
Shows the vehicles speed. comes on during driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock
9. Voltage Light portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
This light monitors the electrical system voltage. service is required. See your authorized dealer immedi-
The light should turn on momentarily as the ately.
engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
Immediate service should be obtained.

12. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light 15. Trip Odometer

This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
become too low. For a bulb check, this light will been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On. If transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
off the engine as soon as possible. Immediate service driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
should be obtained. during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct 4
13. Tachometer
mileage can be determined.
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(rpm x 1000). The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
14. Gear Selector
release the Trip Odometer button.
The electronic gear selector display is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the
each position to all other positions. For a good signal the display resets (approximately 2 seconds).
display will place a box around the selected transmission
range (PRND21). If the PRNDL displays only the char-
acters PRND21 (no boxes), have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.

Also the cluster will display, replacing the odometer, seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
vehicle warning messages such as: door ajar, low wash, next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
No-fuse, Change Oil and the outside temperature on indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
vehicles that are not equipped with the Overhead Con- engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
sole with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer. your personal driving style.
For additional information, refer to “Compass/
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Temperature Mini-Trip Computer” in section 3.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster. cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom- performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off. If the lowing procedure.
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
the vehicle is started.
start the engine).
Change Oil Message
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change times within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you 18. Transmission Temperature Indicator
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
16. Odometer
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEU-
been driven.
TRAL until the light goes off.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of 4
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) – If Equipped
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
This light informs you of a problem with the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
lem is detected the light will come on while the
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
be determined.
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
17. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
This light shows when the fog lights are ON. immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain

on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not 21. Malfunction Indicator Light
come on during starting, have the system checked by an This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
authorized dealer. which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
20. BRAKE System Warning Light
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
This light will light when the ignition key is turned to the
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
ON position and will remain on for a few seconds. If the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
light stays on, it may be an indication that the parking
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
brake has not been released, or there is a low brake fluid
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
level. If the light remains on when the parking brake has
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
tion investigated promptly.
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
parking brake is applied, the light will flash when the suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
gear position is out of park for automatic transmissions. for system service.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
sary. Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger- need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
ous! possible.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

CAUTION!
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
damage to the engine control system. It also could more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
affect fuel economy and driveability. cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- 4
service is required. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Equipped
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
should be checked monthly when cold and
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has low tire pressure telltale.
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

CAUTION!
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for The TPMS has been optimized for the original
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- warning have been established for the tire size
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure placement equipment that is not of the same size,
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to 23. Airbag Indicator
continue to function properly. The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on when the ignition is

first turned on, or the light stays on or comes on while 28. TOW/HAUL
driving, have the airbag system checked by an autho- The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
rized dealer. shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
24. 4WD Indicator HAUL button has been selected.
Indicates when transfer case is in 4WD position. 29. 4WD LOW Indicator
25. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator Indicates transfer case is in 4WD LOW position.
The SVC 4WD lights will come on when the ignition key 30. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button 4
is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
seconds. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly
trip odometer reading.
and that service is required.
26. Cruise Light (Speed Control) ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
system is turned on. the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
27. Cargo Lamp
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
“ACC” position.
Lamp is activated from the headlight control switch,
located below the headlight switch.

When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep- 5 seconds.
ing is accurately maintained.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alter-
nates the location of the time and frequency on the Radio Broadcast Signals
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
of the two, time or frequency is displayed. most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
Clock Setting Procedure eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink. believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune / parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
Audio control. two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune nals.
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.

Two Types of Signals FM Reception

There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the which is the major feature of FM radio.
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
Electrical Disturbances equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) 4
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They will cancel this feature.
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of your radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio SEEK Buttons
(Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite Similar) Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
will remain tuned to the new station until you make available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
another selection. Holding either button will bypass UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) —
SCAN Button If Equipped
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies, (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free 4
pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the information.
SCAN button a second time.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Phone) — If Equipped UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone
TIME Button
(UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
information.
between the time and frequency displays.

Clock Setting Procedure Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
INFO Button
control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
SETUP button, use the TUNE control to select SET
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
increase or decrease the Bass tones. and rear speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the tone, balance, and fade.
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. 4
MUSIC TYPE Button
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones. turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa-
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
tion.
the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
left side speakers. Toggle the Music Type button to select the following
format types:

16 Digit-Character 16 Digit-Character
Program Type Program Type
Display Display
No program type or un- Rhythm and Blues R&B
None
defined Religious Music Rel Musc
Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classical Classicl Rock Rock
Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft
College College Soft Rock Soft Rck
Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Foreign Language Language Sports Sports
Information Inform Talk Talk
Jazz Jazz Top 40 Top 40
News News Weather Weather
Nostalgia Nostalga
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
Oldies Oldies is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Personality Persnlty
Public Public

station with the same selected Music Type name. The SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
Music Type function only operates when in the FM When you are receiving a station that you wish to
mode. commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
and press and release that button. If a button is not
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
SETUP Button the station will continue to play but will not be stored 4
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between into push-button memory.
the following items:
You may add a second station to each push-button by
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control knob to the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
control knob again to save changes. stations to be stored into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM and FM Buttons
pressing the push-button twice.
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding Inserting Compact Disc(s)

button number will display. Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Buttons 1 - 6
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
commit to push-button memory {12 AM and 12 FM
an inch, a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected
stations}.
before a new disc can be loaded.
DISC Button
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and show the disc number, the track number, and index time
MP3 Audio Play in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This Radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism. 4
SEEK Button
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
a second CD if one is already loaded.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
can cause damage to the player. the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD,
MP3 modes.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. SCAN Button
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.

TIME Button Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
Press this button to change the display from a large CD domly selected track.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
RW/FF Play.
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
the current CD track/title.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will file recording media and formats are limited. When
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button tions.
works in a similar manner.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
AM or FM Button The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode. CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other than
change of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- • Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. 3-character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of 4
• Maximum number of folders (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display. designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
3-character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playback of MP3 Files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
VBR bit rates. radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG Sampling Fre- contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
Bit Rate (kbps) time to start playing the MP3 files.
Specification quency (kHz)
320, 256, 224, Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, by the following:
48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32 • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
160, 128, 144, CD-R media
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
to load than non-multisession discs
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios. To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported. single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders return to 9elapsed time9 display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
audio system to amplify the source and play through the 4
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds. vehicle speakers.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
time9 priority mode. audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more
and radio will display song titles for each file.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
time of day will display for 5 seconds (when ignition is JACK)
off).
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone side of your radio faceplate.
(UConnect™) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
Section 3 of this manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Guide.”
REQ Radio

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each 4
Electronic Volume Control listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect™ Hands Free
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
Phone) — If Equipped
the left decreases it.
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be (UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
set at the same volume level as last played. Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more
information.
SEEK Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio Available” message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button (UConnect™ Hands Free Phone) — 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE
If Equipped control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to
Press this button to operate the Hand Free Phone blink.
(UConnect™) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control
Communication (UConnect™)” in Section 3 for more
knob. Press the TUNE control knob to save time change.
information.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect™ System Not The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
Available” message will display on the radio screen. and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
TIME Button
2.
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch INFO Button (Radio Mode)
between the time and frequency displays. Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
Clock Setting Procedure
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
control knob.

RW/FF (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and
Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to
tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or
the arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or left side speakers.
Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) FADE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or left or right to adjust the sound level between the front
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency. 4
and rear speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting
Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will tone, balance, and fade.
display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Bass tones. MUSIC TYPE Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the Music Type button or
MID will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa-
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE control knob to the tion.
right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones.

Toggle the Music Type button to select the following 16 Digit-Character

format types: Program Type
Display
16 Digit-Character Personality Persnlty
Program Type
Display Public Public
No program type or un- Rhythm and Blues R&B
None
defined
Religious Music Rel Musc
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classical Classicl
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Cls Rock
Soft Soft
College College
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Country Country
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Foreign Language Language
Sports Sports
Information Inform
Talk Talk
Jazz Jazz
Top 40 Top 40
News News
Weather Weather
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The • DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
Music Type function only operates when in the FM playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
mode. pushing the SELECT button (If Equipped).
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
will display the following:
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• Subtitle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch 4
SETUP Button
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
available on the disc (If Equipped).
the following items:
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will
NOTE: Use the Tune Control Knob to scroll through the
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
entries. Push the Audio/Select button to select an entry
the disc) (If Equipped).
and make changes.
• Angle – Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (If
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
Equipped).
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (If Equipped). NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.

NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing Menu Language — If Equipped
a DVD.
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
• VES Power - Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF (If default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
Equipped). language supported by disc). If customer wishes to select
a language not listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9
• VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (If
Enter the 4-digit country code using the TUNE control
Equipped).
knob to scroll up and down to select the # and then push
• VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change mode of to select.
either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones, by pressing
Audio Language — If Equipped
the Audio/Select button (If Equipped).
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button will
audio language (effective only if language supported by
allow user to set the clock. Turn the TUNE control
disc). If customer wishes to select a language not listed,
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the country
TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the
code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down
TUNE control knob again to save changes.
to select the # and then push to select.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.

Subtitle Language — If Equipped Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between
subtitle language (effective only if language supported wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.
by disc). If customer wishes to select a language not
AutoPlay — If Equipped
listed, then scroll down and select 9other.9 Enter the
country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted, it
and down to select the # and then push to select. will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play 4
the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
Subtitles — If Equipped
auto play the main title. In such cases, use the menu
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
subtitle OFF or ON.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Audio DRC — If Equipped loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
audio dynamic range - The default is set to 9High,9 and
customer-preferred settings.
under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher
than if the setting is 9Normal.9 AM and FM Buttons (Radio Mode)
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.

SET Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Push-Button Memory button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, DISC Button
the station will continue to play but will not be stored Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
into push-button memory. AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
You may add a second station to each push-button by Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in geographic region. These region codes must match in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
twice. of the player a maximum of 5 times.

Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc

CAUTION!
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
The radio may shut down during extremely hot reading the disc.
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is CAUTION!
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
• This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the 4
CD player mechanism.

Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the eject button and the push-button with
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s) the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD
Press the LOAD button and the push-button with the was loaded and the disc will unload and move
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc is being
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
9INSERT DISC,9 insert the CD into the player.

Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs RW/FF (CD MODE)
will be ejected from the radio. Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
SEEK Button (CD MODE) works in a similar manner.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD, MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
MP3/MWA modes. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the Supported Media (Disc Types)
CD currently playing. The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
TIME Button (CD MODE)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems) Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
When reading discs recorded using formats other than WMA files). Discs created with an option such as 9keep
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read disc open after writing9 are most likely multisession
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: If a disc contains multi formats, such as CD audio and
mp3/wma tracks, the radio will only play the mp3/wma
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of files: 255
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
• Maximum number of folders: 100 The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
3-character extension) as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
3-character extension) data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

frequencies in the following table are supported. In ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate supported by the radios.
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
MPEG Sampling Fre- supported.
Bit rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224, Playback of MP3/WMA Files
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
48, 44.1, 32 the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48 contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
160, 128, 144, time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16 112, 96, 80, 64, Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
Layer 3
56, 48
affected by the following:
WMA Sampling Fre- • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
Bit Rate (kbps) CD-R media
48, 64, 96, 128, • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
WMA 44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR to load than non-multisession discs

• Number of files and folders - Loading times will INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
increase with more files and folders Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
writing to the disc. time9 priority mode.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more 4
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders and radio will display song titles for each file.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to
turning the TUNE control knob. Selecting a folder by
return to 9elapsed time9 display.
pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the
files contained in that folder (or the next folder in
sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).
The folder list will time out after 5 seconds.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which No function.
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers. TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
for 5 seconds.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
No function.
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down. SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function. Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone
(UConnect™) (If Equipped)
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
No function.
Section 3 of this manual.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If intended for home and other limited viewing uses only
Equipped) unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section. engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment DTS
System (VESt) (If Equipped) 9DTS9 and 9DTS 2.09 are trademarks of Digital Theater
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VESt) Systems, Inc.
Guide.” 4
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
Dolby EQUIPPED
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
9Dolby9 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
Dolby Laboratories. of the unit’s faceplate.
Macrovision The RER multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius

This product incorporates copyright protection technol- Satellite Radio player, Navigation system, CD/DVD
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- player, USB port, 20 gigabyte Hard Drive (HDD), and the
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection UConnectt hands-free Bluetooth cellular system.
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is

NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnectt, An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
the unit will respond with a “Feature Not Available” portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
message when selecting controls related to this feature. vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
A 6.5-inch touch screen allows easy menu selection, while
to the car speakers while different audio tracks play
the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and
rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
hands-free mobile phone use.
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and front
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global- seat passenger listen to the radio.
Positioning System-based navigation system with an
Other special features include direct tune, music type
integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identifica-
selections, Traffic Messaging (optional), easy store pre-
tion, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
sets, parental lockout for VES (if equipped), backup
variety of destinations and routes.
camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup
A shared Hard Drive (HDD) for the navigation system, camera, and on some models a dual display screen
the database, and other radio features allows uploads of operation. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
music and photos from CDs or through the USB port. detailed operating instructions.
While the Gracenote database finds the artist, track, and
title for the music.

Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
operating instructions. “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect™) (If Equipped) 3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
operating instructions. the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time 4
setting menu will appear on the screen.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the 4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the screen.
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
and daylight savings information is set.
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
Changing the Time Zone displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
1. Turn on the system.

Changing Daylight Savings Time 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
current setting: proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
1. Turn on the system. 3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
played to change the current setting.
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
Setting the User Clock ward is displayed.
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
performing the following:
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
1. Turn on the system. screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.

6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) — IF EQUIPPED
the word “Save” is displayed. (RER/REQ/REN RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
Show Time if Radio is Off
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
1. Turn on the system. dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 4
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The System Activation
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
subscription information, including the set up of your
on-line listening account at no additional charge. For

further information, call the toll-free number 888-539- selected. Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID
7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com. number will display. The Sirius ID number display will
Please have the following information available when time out in 2 minutes. Press any button on the radio to
calling: exit this screen.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Selecting Satellite Mode
Number (ESN/SID). Press the SAT button until 9SAT9 appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
mode.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Satellite Antenna
Number (ENS/SID)
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
steps:
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
ESN/SID Access gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and place items directly on or above the antenna.
scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is

Reception Quality SEEK Buttons

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
following reasons: channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
structure or under a physical obstacle.
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the without stopping until you release it.
form of short audio mutes. 4
SCAN Button
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
cause intermittent reception. the next channel, pausing for 8 seconds before continuing
to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
second time.
cause signal blockage.
INFO Button
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
position to operate the radio. pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional

3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
the time (press and hold again to return to normal function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
display). channel with the same selected Music Type name.
RW/FF If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
direction of the arrows.
SETUP Button
TUNE Control (Rotary) Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or following items:
counter-clockwise to decrease the channel.
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the SELECT button
MUSIC TYPE Button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscrip-
mode for 5 seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or tion.
turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will
SET Button — To Set the Push-Button Memory
allow the program format type to be selected.
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
type. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
and press and release that button. If a button is not Equipped)
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button, Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™)” in
the channel will continue to play but will not be stored Section 3 of this manual.
into push-button memory.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
You may add a second channel to each push-button by System (VES™) (If Equipped)
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES™) 4
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display Guide.”
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
push-button memory. The channels stored in SET 2 EQUIPPED
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
twice. surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to push-button memory {12 Satellite stations}.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push

button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the CD Player
switch will decrease the volume. Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.

will go to the beginning of the current track or to the 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second ing the disc.
after the current track begins to play.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the or antistatic sprays.
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. 4
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios. 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
following precautions: lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a
surface. known good disc before considering disc player service.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.

SOUND BOX OPERATION Switch Position Light Operation

The Sound Box includes one subwoofer, two tweeters Pulse (right/passenger
and lights that pulsate with the music. side) position – In this
The lights can be either be turned off, on constantly or 1 position the sound is ac-
pulse with the beat of the music. To control the lights, tive and the lights will
pulse with the music.
select one of the following three positions:
Pulse off/light off (center)
position – In this position
2 the sound is active but
the lights will be turned
off.
Constant (left/driver side)
position – In this position
3 the sound is active and
the lights will remain on
constantly.

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Air Conditioning And Heater

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be 4
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating, ventilation and air condi-
tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired Air Conditioning And Heater Operation
interior conditions. To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located at the right
of the control panel. Conditioned air will be directed
through the outlets selected by the mode control. A light

at the top of the snowflake button shows that the air Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
conditioning is on. Press the button a second time to turn Select the recirculation modes when
the air conditioning off. the outside air contains dust, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
desired. This feature allows for recir-
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
culation of interior air only. Air flows
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
through either the panel outlets or
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
both the panel and floor outlets, to-
The mode control (at the right of the gether, depending which recirculation mode is selected.
control panel) can be set in any of the
Panel (Fresh Air Modes)
following positions:
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Mode Control Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between Floor
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden- Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
tified by the small dots. lets located under the instrument panel.

Mix Blower Control

Outside air flows in equal proportions through the The rotary knob on the left of
floor and defroster outlets. the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob
Defrost clockwise to one of the four
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield positions to obtain the blower
through the defroster outlets located at the base of speed you desire. To turn the
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the blower off, turn the knob to 4
edge of each side of the instrument panel. the far left position.
NOTE: The air conditioner compressor operates in both
Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the
A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the
air to help dry the windshield.

Temperature Control Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
The rotary knob at the center window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
of the control panel controls glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
the temperature of the inte- edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
rior air. You can choose your vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
degree of comfort by rotating whenever the Floor, Mix, Defrost, or Bi-Level modes are
the knob. The coldest tem- in use.
perature setting is to the ex-
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
treme left (blue region) and
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
the warmest setting is to the
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
extreme right (red region) of
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
the rotation.
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.

Operating Tips temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases

turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
Fast Cooldown
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
For a fast cooldown, open the windows and turn the
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position, turn
the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
snowflake button to turn on the air conditioning, and direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
drive with the windows open for the first few minutes. position on the control. Adjust the temperature control 4
Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi-level position. When a windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode defrost mode.
position and adjust the temperature control knob and
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Window Fogging Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside rate of window fogging.
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool

Summer Operation and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode. Oper-
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high ating the air conditioner in recirculation mode provides
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide the maximum performance from your air conditioning.
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50% shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly
concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is for fast idle operation.
recommended. See “Cooling System” in the Maintaining
Winter Operation
Your Vehicle section of your Owner’s Manual.
When operating the system during the winter months,
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi- windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is tions. This will help prevent snow going into the ducts.
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear

Operation Tips Chart

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 m Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
5
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 m Four-Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 ▫ NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
m Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 224
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV233/243
m Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 225

218 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . 250
Information / Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II
m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
m Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 256
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 257
m Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System – If ▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 265
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

STARTING AND OPERATING 219
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
m Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 5
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
m Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) — If
m Flexible Fuel — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Base System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . 286
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 m Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 ▫ Snowplow Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 m Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 305
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 ▫ Recreational Towing 2WD Models . . . . . . . . . 305
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 ▫ Recreational Towing 4WD Models . . . . . . . . . 305
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 m Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
The starter should not be operated for more than 15
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such Do not leave children or animals inside parked
intervals will protect the starter from overheating. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key Manual Transmission
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently in NEUTRAL and depress clutch pedal to the floor before 5
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and the clutch is depressed.
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.

Normal Starting
CAUTION!
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds before trying again.
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission WARNING!
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P). Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
If Engine Fails To Start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
serious personal injury.
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
WARNING!
have enough power to continue running when the key is
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans- erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
could enter the catalytic converter and once the smoothly.
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
5
repeated.
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump After Starting
starting procedures and follow them carefully. The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.

Engine Block Heater — If Equipped AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord CAUTION!
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three wire extension cord. Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
of the engine compartment for all engine applications. • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
WARNING! • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving. is at idle speed.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING!
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or the transmission gear selected. The selector lever is
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If mounted on the right side of the steering column. To
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You desired drive position. Pull selector lever toward you
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is when shifting out of Park.
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on Gear Ranges
the brake pedal.
5
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System “P” Park
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out Supplements parking brake by locking the transmission.
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is Engine can be started in this range. Never use Park while
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition vehicle is in motion. Apply parking brake when leaving
switch is in the ON position. Always depress the brake vehicle in this range. Always apply parking brake first,
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK. then place selector in Park position.

WARNING! WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
pulling the lever toward you, after you have set it in could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
P (Park). Make sure it is in Park before leaving the could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
vehicle. something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-

sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.

“R” Reverse “2” Second

Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a For driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain
complete stop. roads where more precise speed control is desirable. Use
it also when climbing long grades, and for engine brak-
“N” Neutral
ing when descending moderately steep grades. To pre-
Shift to Neutral when vehicle is standing for prolonged
vent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 miles per
periods with engine running. Engine may be started in
hour (72 km/h) in this range.
this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the
vehicle. “1” First
For driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at 5
“D” Drive
low speeds 25 mph (40 km/h) or less when going down
For most city and highway driving.
hill. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h) in this range.

Overdrive Operation and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec- operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
tronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are torque converter clutch, later in this section.
present:
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
• the transmission selector is in Drive; transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
perature;
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48 of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
km/h); cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
• the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
• transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
ture.
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive

When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if
equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are
modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed
during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and
automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for
improved braking) will occur during steady braking.
The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instru-
ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores 5
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Tow Haul Button Torque Converter Clutch
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc- in all automatic transmissions. A clutch within the torque
curs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at
performance and reduce the potential for transmission light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under heavier
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When acceleration. This may result in a slightly different feeling

or response during normal operation in high gear. When the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed, or cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
during acceleration, the clutch automatically and will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in Over- any other gear position.
drive and in Drive.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm WARNING!
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter You or others could be injured if you leave the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission vehicle unattended without having the parking
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
Pressing the9TOW/HAUL9 button, when the transmis- ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the especially on an incline.
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several This model is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni-
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the tion system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to start the vehicle.
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into

Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As swift motion. If you move slowly toward reverse you will
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera- encounter a very high load which makes it difficult to
tor pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the enter the gate.
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
NOTE: Always launch in first gear. Damage to the attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
clutch can result from launching in 2nd gear or 3rd gear. partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. the clutch.
When shifting from 5th to 6th gear, do not apply exces- Recommended Shift Speeds
sive knob load toward the Reverse gear gate, as you may To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it 5
overpower Reverse crash-through load and unintention- should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
ally clash into Reverse gear. Also, when shifting from 6th speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
to 5th gear, excessive knob load toward the Reverse gear cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
gate will result in blocking of the shift. increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to acceleration rate.
stop. Reverse has a 9crash-through9 lockout feature. In
order to get into the reverse gate you should start in
neutral 3/4 and move rapidly into the reverse gate in one

6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speed in mph CAUTION!

(km/h)
En- Accel- 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
gine Model Axle eration 2 3 4 5 6 one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
Rate
15 24 34 47 56 which can cause valve damage.
3.21 ACCEL
(24) (39) (55) (76) (90)
3.7L ALL & &
10 19 27 37 41
3.55 CRUISE
(16) (31) (44) (60) (66) To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
3.21 ACCEL should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
15 25 40 45 50
4.7L All & &
3.55 CRUISE
(24) (40) (65) (72) (81) listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting
Speed chart.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down Gear
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time Selec- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume tion
speed. For acceleration at speeds less than 20 mph (30 Maxi- 20 mph 35 mph 55 mph 75 mph 85 mph
km/h), 2nd gear is recommended. mum (32 (56 (88 (120 (135
Speed km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)

The NV233/243 transfer case is designed to be driven in

CAUTION!
the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and / or When additional traction is required, the transfer case
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
depressed. the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION desired position - see Shifting Procedure section for 5
NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
Information/Precautions LOW positions are designed for loose or slippery road
The NV233/243 is an electric shift transfer case and is surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case positions on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause in-
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel. creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
The NV233/243 transfer case provides 4 mode positions:
2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive high range, The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by
4 wheel drive low range, and neutral. depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.

NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow- ments, refer to the 9Shifting Procedure9 for your transfer
ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
out of Neutral (N).
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
instrument cluster. If there is no indicator light on or system is not functioning properly and that service is
flashing, the transfer case position is two-wheel drive required.
(2WD). If the indicator light is on, the desired position
(4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW) has been obtained. WARNING!
If One or More Shift Requirements are not Met: Always engage the parking brake when powering
1. An indicator light will flash. down the vehicle if the (SVC 4WD( light is illumi-
nated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the
2. The transfer case will not shift. vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5)

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233/243 trans- is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
fer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and there- Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
fore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or WARNING!
rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the trans-
fer case. You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position 5
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
(40 km/h). regardless of the transmission position. The parking
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on brake should always be applied when the driver is
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. not in the vehicle.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
transfer case.

For additional information on the appropriate use of each 4WD LOW

transfer case mode position see the information below: 4 Wheel Drive Low (4WD LOW) Range - Low speed 4
wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts to-
2WD
gether. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
power for loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
4WD LOCK exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
4 Wheel Drive Lock (4WD LOCK) Range - Locks the front
N
and rear driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
for loose or slippery road surfaces only.
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.

Shifting Procedure - NV233/243 Transfer Case return the control knob back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
2WD to 4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK to 2WD
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn- 5
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed
if the key is in the accessory position.
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position Systems, the 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
will remain ON, and the newly selected position indica- 2WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements traction). In this situation the selected position indicator
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: light will flash and the original position indicator light

will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
spinning the wheels to complete the shift. There may be on manual transmissions).
a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
wheels have stopped spinning.
switch to the desired position.
4WD LOCK to 4WD LOW or 4WD LOW to 4WD
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
LOCK
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some on manual transmissions).
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
Alternate Procedure
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2-3
mph (3-5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER OF 2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES: RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
press clutch on manual transmissions).
Preferred Procedure
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2-3 mph (3-5
position.
km/h).

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case Operating
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch Information / Precautions
on manual transmissions). The NV 244 Generation II is an electric shift transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch, which is
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
located on the instrument panel.
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is The NV 244 Generation II transfer case provides 4 mode
in process, then the indicator light will flash and the positions - Normal four-wheel-drive (4WD) high range,
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry four-wheel-drive lock (4WD LOCK), four-wheel-drive
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current low (4WD LOW) range, and neutral (N). 5
position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry shift.
This transfer case is equipped with an inter-axle differ-
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take ential that allows driving the vehicle in the normal
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. all-wheel-drive position (4WD) at all times on any given
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and road surface, including dry hard surfaced roads. The
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. 4WD mode allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at
different speeds. This eliminates driveline binding and
component wear normally associated with driving the
vehicle in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced

roads. This feature provides the safety, security, and NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is to be
convenience of operating in all-wheel drive at all times used for recreational towing only. See Recreational Tow-
regardless of road conditions. ing section for specific procedures on shifting into and
out of Neutral (N).
When additional traction is required, the 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
and rear driveshafts together through the transfer case Transfer case position indicator lights are located on the
inter-axle differential and force the front and rear wheels instrument cluster. If there are no indicator lights on or
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by flashing the transfer case position is Four-Wheel Drive
rotating the 4WD Control Switch to these positions. The (4WD) and indicate the current and desired transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are intended for selection (4WD ⇔ 4WD LOCK).
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
The “SVC 4WD” warning light monitors the electric shift
LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced
4WD system. If this light remains on after engine start up
roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
or illuminates during driving, it means that the 4WD
driveline components.
system is not functioning properly and that service is
The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected by required.
depressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

WARNING!
speed is approximately three times that of the 4WD or
Always engage the parking brake when powering 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
down the vehicle if the (Service 4WD( light is illu- not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 40 km/h
minated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow (25 mph).
the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury. Proper operation of four-wheel-drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the transfer case.
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV 244 Generation 5
II transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the
transfer case.

4WD LOCK
WARNING!
Four-Wheel-Drive Lock (4WD LOCK)- Locks the transfer
You or others could be injured if you leave the case inter-axle differential. Forces front and rear wheels
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the slippery road surfaces only.
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position 4WD LOW
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from Four-Wheel-Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)- Low speed 4
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move wheel drive. Locks the transfer case inter-axle differen-
regardless of the transmission position. The parking tial. Forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
brake should always be applied when the driver is
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power
not in the vehicle.
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25
mph (40 km/h).
For additional information on the appropriate use of each N
transfer case mode position see the following information: Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
4WD from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
Normal Four-Wheel-Drive High Range - Employs inter- another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
axle differential. Allows front and rear wheels to rotate at mation.
different speeds. All road surfaces.

Shifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II wheels to complete the shift. There may be a delay up to
Transfer Case 13 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have
stopped spinning.
NOTE: Delayed shifting out of the 4WD LOCK position
may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low tire
pressure, or excessive loading.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. 5
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between Preferred Procedure
4WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning (no
1. With the engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3
traction). In this situation a position indicator light will
mph (3 to 5 km/h).
flash and the original position indicator light will remain
ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
switch to the desired position. transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift. The indicator light will flash and the
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing,
current transfer case position will be maintained. To retry
shift the transmission back into gear.
the selection, turn the control knob back to the current
Alternate Procedure position, wait five (5) seconds, and retry the shift.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop. LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL — IF
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or EQUIPPED
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired when there is a difference between the characteristics of
position. the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
4. After the position indicator light has stopped flashing, normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
shift the transmission back into gear. similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take to the wheel having the better traction.
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are

WARNING!
slushy.
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen- 2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear 3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose visible.
control of the vehicle. 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. 5
both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam-
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a age to your vehicle.
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:

Flowing/Rising Water
CAUTION!
WARNING! • Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water that
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. driving through the standing water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
warning may result in injuries that are serious or • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your
vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your ve-
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. hicle’s fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not
Shallow Standing Water continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears con-
taminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through damage is not covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
shallow standing water, consider the following before • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to
doing so: lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to
the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle
limited warranty.

PARKING BRAKE
WARNING!
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on 5
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you. Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear-shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake

before placing the gear shift lever in PARK; otherwise the

WARNING!
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
NOTE: The instrument cluster brake warning light ing your vehicle, or the vehicle may roll and cause
indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must damage or injury. Also be certain to leave an
be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving automatic transmission in Park. Failure to do so
the vehicle. may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
uphill grade. before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
The parking brake should be applied whenever the
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
driver is not in the vehicle.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

BRAKE SYSTEM The system remains operational in the four-wheel drive

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
example, repeated brake applications with the engine front brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to to lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
required with the power system operating.
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
capability, the remaining system will still function with drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal.
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by 5
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal WARNING!
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the Brake
Warning light and the ABS light during brake use. Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter-
Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System – If ference caused by improperly installed or high out-
Equipped put radio transmitting equipment. This interference
This Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil-
stability and brake performance under most braking ity. Installation of such equipment should be done by
conditions. The system automatically controls the opera- qualified professionals.
tion of the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.

Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System

WARNING!
This Anti-Lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
conditions. The system operates with a separate com- effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to stop.
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The Anti-Lock Brake System includes an amber ABS
warning light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-
Lock Brake System is not functioning. The system reverts
to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition
OFF and ON again may reset the Anti-Lock Brake System
if the fault detected was only momentary.

When you are in a severe braking condition involving use

WARNING!
of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience some
• Anti-lock Brake Systems (ABS) cannot prevent the pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, of the system reverting to the base brake system.
nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
beyond that afforded by the condition of the accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including cate that the system is functioning properly.
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
POWER STEERING
5
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
The standard power steering system will give you good
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
can prevent accidents.
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must steering capability if power assist is lost.
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.

If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will

WARNING!
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering Continued operation with reduced power steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
parking maneuvers. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system. CAUTION!
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos-
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
sible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
way damage the steering system.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION • European Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
Tire Markings
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
NOTE:
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded • High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
ample: P215/65R15 95H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
9....blank....9 = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)

EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and 5
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.

Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire.
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety
standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
Tire Placard Location and spare tires.

Loading occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire the weight referenced here.
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual. 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
your vehicle’s placard.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity 5
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
calculated in Step 4.
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your kg).
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this


1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overload them. tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
5
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
Tire Pressure You could lose control of your vehicle.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.

2. Economy— maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal Information” section of this manual.
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Tire Placard Location
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under inflated. temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire 5
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
(1.6 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial-Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
and cold tire inflation pressures. them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
on the vehicle at any given time.
stalled at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
5
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
result.
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your Tire Spinning
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
vehicle at the first opportunity. stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
WARNING!
manual for additional information.
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects WARNING!
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
result in loss of vehicle control.
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
replaced. tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to: 5
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-

WARNING!
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
could lose control and have an accident resulting in Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
serious injury or death. The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
with oil, grease, and gasoline. rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations may result in false speedometer and odometer
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- readings.
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Alignment And Balance
sion components. You could lose control and have Poor suspension alignment may result in:
an accident resulting in serious injury or death. 5
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings • Fast tire wear.
approved for your vehicle.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or wear.
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load • Vehicle pull to right or left.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire for proper diagnosis.
failure and loss of vehicle control.

Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration. TIRE CHAINS

Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and CAUTION!
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
• The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE equipped with P245/70R16 tires.
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
• Use only “Class S” chains or other traction aids
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle • Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
will be found on the face of the driver’s door. • Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.

These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-

CAUTION!
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of
following precautions:
Dakota trucks.
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise Dakotas with P245/70R16 tires.
occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
CAUTION!
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after 5
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
tires other than P245/70R16. There may not be
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, adequate clearance for the chains and you are
especially with a loaded vehicle.
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. • Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on vehicle. There may not be adequate clearance for
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for the chains and you are risking structural or body
usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of damage to your vehicle.
the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recom-
mended by the manufacturer.

SNOW TIRES tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile

Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc- with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed tain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should a smooth, quiet ride.
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat- Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”

Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis- information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per- driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
formed. for this increased pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
EQUIPPED pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn warning threshold for any reason, including low tem-
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle perature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is lo- The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low 5
cated on the drivers side B-pillar). tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom-
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when mended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire order for the TPM warning lamp to be turned off. The
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than system will automatically update and the TPM warning
3 hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer to lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
the “Tires – General Information” in this section for

have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven

CAUTION!
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive
this information. The TPMS has been optimized for the original
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
(parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 (241 kPa). If been established for the tire size equipped on your
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature drop to damage may result when using replacement equip-
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approxi- ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
mately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
lamp. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the Tire the sensors may result.
Pressure Monitoring lamp will still be ON. In this situa-
tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring lamp will turn OFF
only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

CAUTION!
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always stopping ability.
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois- • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.”
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, 5
and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
failure or condition. pressure in the tire.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Base System – If Equipped
while adjusting your tire pressure. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the system will automatically update and the TPM warning
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
the proper pressure. have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 kph) to receive
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) consists of
this information.
the following components:
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
• Receiver Module
on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when
• 4 Wheel Sensors a system fault is detected. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. A
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an au-
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
dible chime will be activated when one or more of
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible
sensors.
chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each
condition that it detects. Should this occur, you should 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of that affects radio wave signals.
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. The

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 10 min-
housings. utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor- reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale 5
pressure in the spare tire. Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
to receive this information.
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due
to the low tire.

General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and All engines (except 5.7L engines) are de-
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the signed to meet all emissions regulations
following conditions: and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality un-
leaded “regular” gasoline having an oc-
• This device must accept any interference received, tane rating of 87. The use of premium
including interference that may cause undesired op- gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions,
eration. the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit
over high quality regular gasolines, and in some circum-
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
stances may result in poorer performance.
following licenses:
The 4.7 HO engine is designed to meet all
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 tory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 91. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 91 octane
for optimum performance.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is excellent performance and durability for the engine and
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such fuel system components.
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
before considering service for the vehicle. Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
Over 40 auto manufacturer’s world wide have issued and ates are required in some areas of the country during the
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. 5
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- your vehicle.
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available. CAUTION!
Reformulated Gasoline DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” and driveability problems and may damage critical
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- fuel system components.
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.

NOTE: 4.7L Engine — If Equipped , is now rated for vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
E85 Ethanol use. Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
door label can operate on E-85. For more information, of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
refer to “Flexible Fuel” in this section. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
nol.
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT In Gasoline
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some

Fuel System Cautions NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:
WARNING!
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using
leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the
emission control system. Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the
precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunc-
tions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a
notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your colorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the 5
engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a
immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance. parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a engine running for more than a short period, adjust the
premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance.
result. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly.
enhancers is not recommended. Many of these products con- Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
tain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent
vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer. entering the vehicle.

ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the

fuel tank is full.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel Cap Holder
NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.

WARNING! CAUTION!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
containers on the ground while filling. impurities into the fuel system.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

WARNING! 5
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use • Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
with this vehicle. vehicles while removing the cap or filling the
tank.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.

FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by the unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap

ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)

CAUTION!
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler cap (gas cap) 15% unleaded gasoline.
can operate on E-85.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the 5
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
E-85 Badge

For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be- Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. (E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
in Mopart engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
than 1/4 full
DaimlerChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufac-
• you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, devel-
a period of at least 5 minutes
oped during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines. Use
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability Mopart or an equivalent oil meeting the specification
during warm up. MS-6395.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90°F, Starting
you may experience hard starting and rough idle follow- The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
ing start up even if the above recommendations are when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F (-18 C). In the
followed. range of 0 F (-18 C) to 32 F (0 C), you may experience an

increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and

CAUTION!
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
Cruising Range compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg) Maintenance
and your driving range to decrease by about 30% com- If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow Sched-
pared to gasoline operation. ule B in the maintenance schedule section of this manual.
5
Replacement Parts CAUTION!
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com- vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
patible parts. may affect driveability.

VEHICLE LOADING Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
Certification Label
included on this label and shows the Month, Day, and
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Inflation Pressure (Cold)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
springs, tires, or wheels). capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a 5
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
added.
Tire Size
Loading
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
this tire size.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
listed.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

WARNING!
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
specified weight limitations are met. lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight your vehicle.
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the following example. Note
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect that neither GVWR nor GAWR capabilities are exceeded.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
the brakes operate. shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not the
weights for your vehicle. Also, the amount of load
added to both the front and rear axles can be computed

after the vehicle has been weighed both in its (curb TRAILER TOWING
weight( condition, and in its (loaded and ready for In this section you will find safety tips and information
operation( condition. on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing. 5
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

WARNING!
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom- can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded control of the vehicle and have an accident.
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Tongue Weight (TW)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). as part of the load on your vehicle.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal Area

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.

TSC (Trailer Sway Control) – If Equipped that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
• Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
swaying motions while traveling.
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to Weight-Carrying Hitch
stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re- hitches are the most popular on the market today and
quired. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying. they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized 5
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailers.
tongue weight recommendations. Even if your vehicle is
Weight-Distributing Hitch
equipped with electronic trailer sway control, mechanical
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
sway control is recommended when appropriate for the
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
size of your trailer.
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
• Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch

system may reduce handling, stability, braking per- Weight Distributing Hitch System
formance, and could result in an accident.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory 5
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package.
Improper Adjustment of See your dealer for package content.
Weight Distributing System The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.

Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains Trailer Towing Weights
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain. (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Trailer Hitch Classification NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
Class Max. GTW mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
(Gross Trailer Wt.) addresses:
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
• http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg) • http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4540 kg) Trailer and Tongue Weight
Duty Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
Fifth Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lbs the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
(4540 kg) Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
your vehicle. rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on Consider the following items when computing the
your bumper or trailer hitch. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional 5
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual.

Towing Requirements
WARNING!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom- Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
mended: Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
CAUTION!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 and will not shift during travel. When trailering
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
your vehicle. can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
have an accident.
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-

Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
or GCWR, ratings.
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your 2. GTW

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
3. GAWR
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
slack for turning corners. (This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
percentage of total trailer weight).
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in Towing Requirements — Tires
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the 5
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
spare tire.
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels. − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
ratings are not exceeded:
pressures before trailer usage.
1. GVWR

− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear brake controller is not required.
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor- lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for lbs (907 kg).
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase CAUTION!
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
This could cause inadequate braking and possible brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

WARNING!
wiring harness.
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy- The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes Refer to the following illustrations.
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front 5
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness 4 - Pin Connector
and connector.

Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission

The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
HAUL” feature should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” feature while operat-
ing the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
7- Pin Connector 45 minutes of continuous operation. See the Maintenance
Towing Tips Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and fluid change intervals.
backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, before towing.
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.

Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped) Towing Tips — Cooling System

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat- To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
ing, turn the “TOW HAUL” feature ON when driving in heating, take the following actions:
hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on
− City Driving
more severe grades.
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
Equipped)
− Highway Driving
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Reduce speed.
5
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed − Air Conditioning
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Turn off temporarily.
you can get back to cruising speed.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
maximize fuel efficiency. tion.

SNOWPLOW
CAUTION!
Snowplow Usage
Do not use your vehicle for snowplow applications. Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Snowplows, winches, and other aftermarket equip- WARNING!

ment should not be added to the front end of your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be affected by Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
the change in the front end structure. The airbags affect performance of the airbag system in an acci-
could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
during a collision resulting in serious injury or described earlier in this manual
death.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

CAUTION!
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing 2WD Models The transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
Recreational towing of 2WD models is not allowable. recreational towing. The Neutral (N) selection button
Towing the vehicle with the transmission in Neutral can is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD
cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the drive- Control Switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
shaft for towing is not recommended, since this would Neutral (N) can take place with the selector switch in
allow fluid to drain from the transmission. any mode position.
Recreational Towing 4WD Models Automatic Transmissions must be placed in P (Park) 5
position for recreational towing.
CAUTION! Manual Transmissions must be placed in gear (for
example, 4th gear) for recreational towing. Failure to
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a follow these procedures can cause severe transmis-
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational sion and/or transfer case damage.
towing.
Recreational Towing Procedure

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.

CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that

the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Shut engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not
start the engine.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
4. Depress brake pedal. comes on release Neutral (N) button.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress 8. Start engine.
clutch on manual transmission.
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
4 seconds. there is no vehicle movement.

11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
(D). quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
released.
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). Shift
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no
Manual transmissions into 4th gear.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable. indicates that shift requirements have not been met. 5
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
CAUTION!
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapse Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
and the shift has been completed. If any of these require- mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case
ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no transfer case in Neutral (N), ensure that the engine is
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).

Returning to Normal Operation 8. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for the Neutral (N) button.
normal usage.
9. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the
1. Reconnect the negative battery cable. transfer case will shift to the position identified by the
selector switch.
2. The vehicle must be at a complete stop.
10. Start the engine. Shift the automatic transmission into
3. Place the ignition if the Off position (if it has been
Drive (D), or place the manual transmission in 1st gear
moved or the engine has been started).
and momentarily release the clutch, to verify that the
4. Place ignition key in the ON position (engine Off). transfer case has engaged.
5. Depress brake pedal. 11. Set parking brake. Shift automatic transmission to
Park (P) or shift manual transmission to Neutral.
6. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
1 second.
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met

during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position

WARNING!
indicator lights will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. You or others could be injured if you leave the
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
position indicator lights will be on or flashing. disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light despite the transmission position. The parking brake
indicates that shift requirements have not been met. should always be applied when the driver is not in
5
the vehicle.

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE

CAUTION!
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar inner surface.
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be The following information about your vehicle is dis-
damaged. played on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identifi-
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because cation Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage with descriptions of all production and special equip-
internal parts. ment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the equipment identification
plate when ordering parts.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 m Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
m Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 m Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 6
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 ▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER This is an emergency warning system and should not be
The flasher switch is on the top of the steering column, used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
just behind the steering wheel. Press the flasher switch vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
and all front and rear directional signals will flash other motorists.
intermittently.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Press the switch a second time to turn off the emergency flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
flashers. key removed and the vehicle locked.
ADDING FUEL
If using a portable fuel container, it should have a flexible
nozzle long enough to reach past the restriction in the
fuel filler tube.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

WARNING!
Jack Location
• Never allow any lit smoking materials near the In the Dakota, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment
tank. under the rear passenger seat. Crew Cab model scissor
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the
running. rear passenger seat.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck until the jack is secured into place.
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas con-
tainers on the ground while filling.
A finger operated helper tool is provided to assist re- 6
moval and stowage of the jack. This tool must be
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.

Jack Stowage Location Extended Cab Jack Screw

WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.

The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
Removing The Spare Tire

Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck. 6
Jack Stowage Location Crew Cab Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it

out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt • Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
center of the wheel. from under the vehicle.
Steps for Removing the Spare Tire • Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
• Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
the supplied finger assist tool.
• Remove the finger assist tool from jack and set aside
until jack is stowed.
• Assemble the jack tools.
• Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
• Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension

It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to

avoid tangling the loose cable.
6
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension
Spare Tire Stowage Location

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.

Tire Changing Procedure Preparations

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
WARNING! slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission). On Four
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L”
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You position.
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run WARNING!
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
where it can be raised on a lift. vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.

• Block both the front and rear to inboard transition, as shown. Operate the jack using
of the wheel diagonally oppo- the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube
site the jacking position. For extension, may be used but is not required.
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools 6
from stowage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the

positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the

rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Right Rear Jacking Location

NOTE: Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
Left Rear Jacking Location sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING! WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the ways stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
vehicle only enough to remove the tire. in the places provided.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install 7. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
8. Adjust the tire pressure when possible. 6
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 130-160 ft.
lbs. (177-217 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your dealer
or at a service station.

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

WARNING!
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: position it properly across the wheel opening.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle. with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
raised. into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking. to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack. 3 times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does not fit
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated. through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire must
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck.
motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the value stem
facing the ground.

JUMP STARTING Check the Battery Test Indicator (if equipped). If a light or
bright colored dot is visible in the indicator (if equipped),
WARNING! DO NOT jump-start the battery.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not If the indicator (if equipped) is dark or shows a green dot,
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth- proceed as follows:
ing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching 1. Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If as watch bands or bracelets which might make an
acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the contami- unintended electrical contact.
nated area immediately with large quantities of
water. 2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with-
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-

out letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place 6
the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away OFF on both vehicles.
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that 3. Turn OFF heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
exceeds 12 volts. loads.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive

WARNING!
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
battery. discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
cause the battery to explode.
WARNING!
During cold weather when temperatures are below
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
could establish a ground connection and personal may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting because the
injury could result. battery could rupture or explode. The battery tem-
perature must be brought up above freezing point
before attempting jump start.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE,
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main-
WARNING! tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
Any procedure other than above could result in: idle with the transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles.
the battery vent; This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of 6
transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
stuck vehicle.
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks. Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.

Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious
injury.
Tow Hooks

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
damage your vehicle. Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent position along with the front wheels raised and the rear
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recom- wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30
mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 6
mended. Attach towing device to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle — not to bumpers or associated miles (25 km).
brackets. State and local laws applying to vehicles
under tow must be observed.

If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ) NOTE: Towing the vehicle, with the rear wheels on the
or faster than 30 mph, it must be towed on a flatbed, or ground, at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the 15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage.
ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m 3.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
m 4.7L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
m Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 342
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 ▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
m Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 7
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
m Fuses (Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
m Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And
▫ Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Turn Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stoplamp,
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 And Turn Signal Bulbs — Replacement . . . . . . 377
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp And
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 385

▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
m Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

3.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT

4.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system • If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can PROGRAMS
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improp- In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
erly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel filler cap message an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
gas cap until a 9clicking9 sound is heard. This is an
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
problem persists, the message will appear the next time
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap.
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
for testing.
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off. Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently 7
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system is determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
the following: proceed to the I/M station.
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch. If your OBD system is not ready you should see your
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
or start the engine. If you crank or start the engine, you serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
will have to start this test over. need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
3. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal that the system is now ready.
bulb check.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
happen:
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 sec- vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
onds and then remain on until the first engine crank or station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s with the engine running.
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.

REPLACEMENT PARTS
WARNING!
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
caused by the use of non-Mopart parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
warranty. job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
include detailed service information for your vehicle. services determined by the engineers who designed your
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure vehicle. 7
yourself. Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
against you. However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is

CAUTION!
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
Checking Engine Oil Level your engine.
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.

Change Engine Oil • If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
Road conditions and your style of driving affect the fuel.
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
following to determine if ANY apply to you:
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C). whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
9Maintenance Schedules9 section of this manual.
• Stop and Go driving.
If NONE of these apply to you, then change your engine
• Extensive engine idling.
oil every 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months, whichever
• Driving in dusty conditions. comes first and follow schedule 9A9 of the 9Maintenance
Schedules9 section of this manual.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months 7
whichever comes first.
• Trailer towing, Taxi, Police or delivery service (com-
4x4 Models, If Used Primarily For Off-Road Operation
mercial service).
Every 50 hours of use.
• Off-Road or desert operation.

Dusty Conditions American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of Identification Symbol
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these This symbol means that the oil has
conditions, special attention should be given to the been certified by the American
engine air cleaner. The crankcase ventilation system Petroleum Institute (API). The
should also be checked periodically. Make sure that these manufacturer only recommends
units are always clean. This will tend to reduce to a API Certified engine oils.
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter
the engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil
MS-6395. filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.

For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Compartment illustration in this section. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
ber should not be used.
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
Synthetic Engine Oils oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
Engine Oil Filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
oil change.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality 7
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
service. Mopart Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
ditives.
filter and are recommended.

Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension Spark Plugs

Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic Spark plugs must fire properly to assure proper engine
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required. performance and emission control. The plugs installed in
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be your vehicle should operate satisfactorily in normal
inspected at the specified intervals, and replaced if re- service for the mileage indicated in the Maintenance
quired. See your authorized dealer for service Chart. New plugs should be installed at this mileage. The
entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
due to a faulty spark plug. Check the Vehicle Emissions
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Control Information label for the proper type of spark
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
plug for your vehicle.
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing, or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication CAUTION!
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen-
erator belt tension can cause battery failure. When replacing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
ence between the belts and other engine components.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Engine Fuel Filter

Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe con- Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
ditions, the filter element should be inspected periodi- fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
cally and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Catalytic Converter
Schedule “B”.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
WARNING!
catalyst as an emission control device.
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst 7
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with damage.
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
against you. tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

WARNING!
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
motion. burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
vehicle. splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires diately with large amounts of water.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. booster battery or any other booster source with an
Maintenance Free Battery output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently clamps to touch each other. 7
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic • Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
maintenance required. contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.

cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

CAUTION!
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the WARNING!
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
positive and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
Air Conditioner Maintenance under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
start of each warm season. This service should include should be done by an experienced repairman.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro- Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
using recovery and recycling equipment. power steering fluid.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified 7
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9

Front Suspension Ball Joints Body Lubrication

The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons. Damaged seals seat tracks, doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
should be replaced to prevent leakage or contamination periodically to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect
of the grease. against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any
lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
Drive Shaft Constant Velocity Joints
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and
All four wheel drive models are equipped with four
grease should be removed. Particular attention should
constant velocity joints. Periodic lubrication of these
also be given to hood latching components to insure
joints is not required. However, the joint boot should be
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
inspected for external leakage or damage periodically. If
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
external leakage or damage is evident, the joint boot and
should be cleaned and lubricated.
grease should be replaced immediately. Continued op-
eration could result in failure of the joint due to water The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
and dirt contamination of the grease. This would require year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
complete replacement of the joint assembly. Refer to the amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock
Service Manual for the detailed replacement procedure. Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti-
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
mulations of salt or road film.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use rating information can be found on most washer fluid
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt containers.
from a dry windshield.
WARNING!
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with Commercially available windshield washer solvents
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care 7
Windshield Washers must be exercised when filling or working around
The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at the washer solution.
regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the

After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopart All damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
to paint or trim. for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
system. monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is low the preceding safety tips.

Cooling System accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
WARNING! face of the condenser.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to leaks.
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
is hot. not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
Engine Coolant Checks properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE- 7
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill

CAUTION!
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. • Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount engine coolants may result in engine damage and
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
antifreeze solution. fied coolant as soon as possible.
Selection Of Coolant • Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
coolant type. they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.

Adding Coolant • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160 the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this cooling system.
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. When
the vehicle is operated.
adding coolant:
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopart
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
changes.
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) 7
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
anticipated.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
WARNING! local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- Coolant Level
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
the system is hot or under pressure. determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- on the bottle.
gine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your

service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
be checked once a month.
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do protected against freezing.
not overfill.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
Points To Remember level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
sure tested for leaks.
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- corrosion protection of your engine which contains 7
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to aluminum components.
enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the collapsed.
condenser clean, also.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter are secure and no leaks are present.
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
hoses and clamps, or their equivalent in material and
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
specification, in any fuel system servicing. It is manda-
mileage, and increased emissions.
tory to replace all clamps that have been loosened or
Emission Related Components removed during service. Care should be taken in install-
ing new clamps to insure they are properly torqued.
Fuel System Hoses And Vapor/Vacuum Harnesses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) Valve
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug-
cracking, checking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive ging because of deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the
swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular PCV valve and passage with increasing mileage. Have
attention should be given to examining hose surfaces the PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust mani- operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
fold. plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve – Do not

attempt to clean the oil PCV valve! Check ventilating pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
hose for indication of damage or plugging with deposits. pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
Replace if necessary. low, check system for leaks.
Brake System Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Power Disc Brakes (Front)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
WARNING!
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material. Use of brake fluid that may have a lower initial
Brake Master Cylinders boiling point, or is unidentified as to specifications,
The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked may result in sudden brake failure during hard
whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
brake system warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid 7
to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir
of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing the cap. With
disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake

moving in reverse will maintain your brakes at the

WARNING!
specified adjustment. Adjustment will continue until the
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in brake linings are worn. To avoid brake failure, brake pull
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the or damage to the rotors or drums, inspect the brake
brake fluid catching fire. linings as specified in the maintenance schedule. If
excessively worn, the brake linings must be replaced.
Brake Hoses
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hy-
moisture. draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
CAUTION! worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
possible burst failure.
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
Brake Linings
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
During normal driving, a few brake applications while

while the vehicle is level, enough lubricant should be

WARNING!
added to bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. This fluid does not require periodic changing. However,
You could have an accident. If you see any sign of if it becomes necessary to add or replace the fluid in these
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake transmissions, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
hoses replaced immediately. Parts for correct fluid type.
Clutch Hydraulic System Fluid Level Check
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the operating temperature 180°F (82°C). This occurs after at
system must be replaced. least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
Manual Transmission tween the fingertips. 7
Fluid Level Check To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
This fluid should be checked whenever other underhood the following procedure must be used:
services are performed. The fluid level is checked by
removing the fill plug. If the level of the lubricant is more 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
than 1/49 (6.35 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole temperature.

2. The vehicle must be on level ground. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
pedal.
with the fluid at approximately 70°F ( 21°C) (room
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
position ending with the lever in P (Park). room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
180°F ( 82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
seated.
normal operating temperature.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT” CAUTION!
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait produce an accurate reading.
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.

To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission

CAUTION!
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
dipstick tube. shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
Follow the proper Maintenance Schedule for your type of more frequent fluid and filter changes.
driving.
Selection of Lubricant Special Additives
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis- mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
7
sion fluid; refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
for correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
recommended fluid. they may adversely affect seals.

Transfer Case Axles

Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the fluid type.
transfer case serviced immediately.
The manufacturer does not recommend regularly sched-
uled oil changes for axles in vehicles whose operation is
CAUTION!
classified as normal truck service.
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
with low transfer case fluid. result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
The transfer case fluid should be drained and refilled at require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
the intervals specified.
Rear Axle
Lubricant Selection Rear Axle Limited-slip differentials require the use of
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct Mopar limited-slip additive. Refer to Recommended Flu-
fluid type. ids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
This should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a
fluid change is made, when equipped with limited-slip

differential. Rear axle fluid level should be 1/49 (6.4mm) The following maintenance recommendations will enable
below filler plug for 8 1/4”, and 9 1/49 axles. you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Front Axle
Front Axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill What Causes Corrosion?
plug. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
• Stone and gravel impact.
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly • Insects, tree sap and tar.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities. 7
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.

Washing Special Care

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve- • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
rinse the panels completely with clear water. a month.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu- • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible. of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
• Use Mopart auto polish to remove road film and • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
scratch the paint. considered the responsibility of the owner.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
CAUTION! The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
metal and painted surfaces. de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
mud or stone shields behind each wheel. Equipped
YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
• Use Mopart touch up paint on scratches as soon as
manner:
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle. • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar • For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-purpose cleaner
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, 7
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or damp towel to remove soap residue.
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
finish.
tials products.

Interior Care
WARNING!
Use Mopart Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Use Mopart Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
trim. closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Mopart Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery. Glass Surfaces
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please ments which may scratch the elements.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not directly on the mirror.
required to maintain the original condition.

Instrument Panel Bezels 2. Dry with a soft tissue.

Seat Belt Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve- solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
contact any surface. wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER) 7
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri-
bution center located on the left side of the engine
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be compartment.
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.

Cartridge Mini
Cavity Description
Fuse Fuse
1 Spare
2 40 Amp Ignition Accessory
Green (ACC)
3 30 Amp Electric Brake
Pink
4 50 Amp Power Seat
Red
5 40 Amp Ignition Run Only
Green
6 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow (IOD) Cabin Com-
Power Distribution Center
partment Node
These power distribution centers house new plug-in (CCN), Radio
“Cartridge” fuses which replace all the in-line fusible 7 10 Amp Powertrain Control
links previously used. The power distribution centers Red Module (PCM)/Fuel/
also contain “Mini”fuses and plug-in “ISO” relays. These RAD/AC Coils
fuses and relays can be obtained from your dealer.

Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini

Cavity Description Cavity Description
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
8 10 Amp Cabin Compartment 16 20 Amp Horn
Red Node (CCN)/Mirror/ Yellow
4x4 17 20 Amp ABS Feed (Valves)
9 10 Amp Airbag System #3 Yellow
Red 18 20 Amp Fuel Pump
10 Spare Yellow
11 10 Amp AC Clutch 19 15 Amp Center High Mounted
Red Blue Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
12 15 Amp T Tow Lt Stop/Turn 20 20 Amp Cabin Compartment
Blue Yellow Node (CCN) Door
13 15 Amp Trailer Tow Rt Stop/ Locks/Brake Trans- 7
Blue Turn mission Shift Inter-
14 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw lock (BTSI)
Yellow (IOD) #2 21 25 Amp Audio Amp
15 25 Amp Trans/Powertrain Natural
Natural Control Module 22 20 Amp Power Outlet (Switch-
(PCM) Yellow able)


Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
23 20 Amp Fog Lamps 32 30 Amp Front Control Module
Yellow Pink (FCM) 1 (Ext. Lights #
24 20 Amp Powertrain Control 1)
Yellow Module (PCM) B+ 33 30 Amp Auto Shut Down
25 15 Amp Cabin Compartment Pink (ASD)
Blue Node (CCN) Illumi- 34 30 Amp Front Control Module
nation Pink (FCM) 2 (Ext. Light #
26 Spare 2)
27 10 Amp Power Mirror 35 40 Amp HVAC Blower Motor
Red Green
28 20 AmpY- Power Outlet 36 10 Amp Ignition UNLK/
ellow Red RN/ST
29 20 Amp Front Control Module 37 10 Amp Crank
Yellow (FCM) 4 (Wipers) Red
30 Spare 38 20 Amp Run/Start
31 Spare Blue


Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
39 30 Amp Starter Solenoid 47 40 Amp Ignition Run/
Pink Green Accessory (Acc)
40 Spare 48 20 Amp Sunroof/Sound Box
41 30 Amp Wiper Motor Blue
Pink 49 30 Amp Trailer Tow B+
42 25 Amp Front Control Module Pink
Natural (FCM) 5 (T-Case) 50 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
43 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps Green tem (ABS) Module
Red (Pump)
44 10 Amp Rt Park Lamps 51 40 Amp Park Lamps
Red Green 7
45 20 Amp Trailer Tow Park 52 Spare
Yellow Lamps 53 40 Amp Rear Defogger
46 10 Amp Airbag System # 2 Green
Red 54 Spare

Cartridge Mini CAUTION!

Cavity Description
Fuse Fuse
55 10 Amp Cabin Compartment When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
Red Node (CCN) Acces- only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
sory (ACC) Feed use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
56 10 Amp Heated Seats result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
Red properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
57 20 Amp Airbag System # 2 problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Yellow
58 20 Amp Heated Seats
Yellow NOTE: If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for
59 10 Amp HVAC Module longer than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect
Red your battery. You may do this by disconnecting the
60 10 Amp ABS Module battery or by disconnecting the two ignition-off draw
Red (I.O.D.) fuses located in the Auxiliary Power Distribution
61 20 Amp Front Control Module Center (PDC) located in the engine compartment. The
Yellow (FCM) 3 (Reverse I.O.D. cavities include a snap-in retainer that allows the
Lamps)

fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS

fuse block. Pressing the I.O.D. fuse back into the cavity
reconnects it. LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb No.
Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
VEHICLE STORAGE
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
Reading Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WL212–2
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse LIGHT BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
I.O.D. cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the Front Park/Turn/Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NA
fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
fuse block. Center High Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
7
• The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode
License Plate Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain. Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
• As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cable from the battery.

BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
CAUTION!
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass with

your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
1. Open the hood

2. Remove the three (3) bolts from the front of the
headlight housing. 3. Grasp the headlight and pull firmly to disengage the
headlight housing from the fender panel.

4. While firmly holding the headlight housing in your NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the connector to
hands unlock and disconnect headlight bulb connector. replace the park/turn signal bulb. If the bulb socket
needs replacement disconnect the connector.
5. Twist 1/4 turn and remove headlight bulb from hous-
ing and replace. NOTE: The headlight bulb is a Halogen bulb. Take care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from
your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which
reduces bulb life.
To remove the park/turn signal bulb, rotate bulb socket
1/4 turn and remove socket from housing. Pull bulb
straight from socket.
Unlocking Headlight Connector

Removing Park/Turn Signal Bulb Disconnecting Park/Turn Signal Connector

Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stoplamp, and Turn

Signal Bulbs — Replacement
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
Pulling Housing From Body

2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body. 7
Removing the Two (2) Screws

3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to from the 4. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
housing.
Pulling Bulb From Socket

Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing

5. Reverse Procedure to install bulb and housing. Place Center High-Mounted Stoplamp And Cargo Lamp
the two raised blocks passed the body.
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
7
Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body
Removing Screws

2. Remove housing from Cab 3. Remove connector from housing tab for more clear-
ance.
Removing Housing from Cab

Removing Connector from Tab

4. Turn desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove socket 5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
and bulb from housing.
Pulling Bulb From Socket 7

Removing Socket From Housing • Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
6. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.

License Lamps 2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

1. Using a screw driver pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
Rotating Socket
Removing Housing From Bumper

3. Pull bulb from socket. Fog Lamps

1. Disconnect connector from fog lamp by raising wire
harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness connector.
2. Rotate fog lamp bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise and
pull to remove from fog lamp housing.
3. Reverse Procedure to install.
Pulling Bulb From Socket 7

4. Reverse procedure for installation.

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric
Fuel
3.7L/4.7L, 87 Octane 22 Gal. 83L
4.7L HO, 91 Octane, Recommended Not Required 22 Gal. 83L
Engine Oil (with filter)
3.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 5 Qt. 4.7L
4.7L, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
4.7L HO, SAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Qt. 5.7L
Cooling System (includes 2.1 Qts./2L for coolant bottle
3.7L (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L
4.7L (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L
4.7L HO (Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 13.3 Qt. 12.5L
NOTE: All fluid capacities are approximate capacities.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology)
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler
cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter Mopart Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (4.7L Engine) Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039”) Lower Bank — FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051”)
Spark Plugs (3.7L Engine) ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043”)
Fuel Selection 3.7L/4.7L 87 Octane 7
Fuel Selection 4.7L HO Premium Unleaded 91 Octane only or higher

Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission (Getrag 238) Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent.
Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763).
Rear Axle SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require Mopart limited-slip additive (MS-10111). Four ounces (118 ml)
should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.

M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 388 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 390
S
m Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

M 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
E type on the following pages must be done at the times or time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
N mileages specified to assure the continued proper func-
A The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument
N tioning of the emission control system. These, and all
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicat-
C other maintenance services included in this manual,
E ing that an oil change is necessary.
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
H areas and very short trip driving. is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
E
D as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
U
L malfunction is suspected. NOTE:
E • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
individual using any automotive part which has been
nated.
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 389 M
A
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your I
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
N
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
T
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark. E
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals N
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if A
comes first. required. N
C
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message Once a Month E
after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or S
uled oil change is performed by someone other than your C
damage. H
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
E
described under “Oil Change Required” in “Use Factory • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals D
Settings” of the EVIC section in this manual or under as required. U
“Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster L
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake E
Descriptions section of this manual.
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and S
At Each Stop for Fuel add as needed. 8
• Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while operation.

A
I At Each Oil Change Required Maintenance Intervals
N
T • Change the engine oil filter. NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
E
N equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
N • Check the Manual Transmission fluid level. located on the side of the engine.
C
E The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
CAUTION!
S plug and must be change every 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
C
H Failure to perform the required maintenance items The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
E may result in damage to the vehicle. premium plug and must be changed every 102,000 miles
D (170 000 km).
U
L
E
S
8

A
I
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage N
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) T
E
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N
A
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6 N
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6 C
E
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner 12,000 20 000 12 S
filter, replace if necessary. C
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12 H
E
Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using D
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent 18,000 30 000 18 U
trailer towing. L
E
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at S
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
8
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
24,000 40 000 24
seals, replace if necessary.

A
I
N Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
T are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
E
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
A
N Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
C Inspect the transfer case fluid. 30,000 50 000 30
E
Replace the top row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines.
30,000 50 000 30
S **
C Replace the spark plugs on 3.7L engines. 30,000 50 000 30
H
E Change the automatic transmission fluid & main
D sump filter, if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
U 60,000 100 000 60
ing: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing (4.7L
L engines only).
E
S Change the automatic transmission fluid & main
sump filter, if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
8 ing: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing (3.7L
60,000 100 000 60
engines).

A
I
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage N
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) T
E
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N
A
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for N
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or fre- 60,000 100 000 60 C
quent trailer towing. E
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your S
vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow- C
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service H
60,000 100 000 60 E
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
more then 50% of your driving is at sustained high D
U
speeds during hot weather, above 90F° (32C°). L
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90 E
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
Replace the ignition cables on 4.7L engines. 102,000 170 000 102 8
Replace the side row of spark plugs on 4.7L engines.
102,000 170 000 102
**

A
I
N Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
T are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
E
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
A
N Change the automatic transmission fluid, main sump
C filter and spin-on cooler return filter (if equipped) if
E using your vehicle for any of the following: police, 120,000 200 000 120
taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing (4.7L engines
S only).
C
H Change the automatic transmission fluid & main
E sump filter, if using your vehicle for any of the follow-
D 120,000 200 000 120
ing: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing (3.7L
U
L engines).
E Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
S
8

A
I
WARNING! N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you N
C
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service E
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 401 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 9

398 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
work to be performed may not be covered by the
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
pointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
Prepare A List your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, Warranty service must be done by an authorized
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
service advisor know. that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to • Vehicle identification number
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
manner.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
P.O. Box 21–8004
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
this process.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Phone: (800) 465–2001
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
• Dealership name

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
Service Contract your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for your those documents.
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
concerns.
date. If you have any questions about your service

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

WARNING!
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals this vehicle.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and MOPART PARTS
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra- 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada:
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the defect to the Canadian government should write to
manufacturer. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS • Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.

To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
for an order form.
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes). procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Service Manuals.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia- safety tips. 9
grams, and charts.

Call Toll Free at: All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Treadwear
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
Or wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
TIRE QUALITY GRADES in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
The following describes the tire grading categories estab- characteristics and climate.
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis- Traction Grades
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
of the tires on your car. wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
mance. grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
WARNING! Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Temperature Grades Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the 9

INDEX
10

408 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,312 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 343 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,160
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 19
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . 209,213 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,347 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209,346 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,224
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,270 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45,166 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,225,359
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,70 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,160 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 352,353,384 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

INDEX 409
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,164
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 68
Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Box, Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Caps, Filler
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,357 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,250 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151,281
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 10

410 INDEX
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,197,199,209 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 353
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,56,57 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,64 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,354
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Cleaning Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,172,184,199 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 352,384,385
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

INDEX 411
Crates Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Rear Convenience Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Disarming, Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Disposal
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Driving
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,211 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Dipsticks Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 121
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Emergency, In Case of
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 10

412 INDEX
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 388 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,281,350
Engine Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,350
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,281 Filters
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,385
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,384,385 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Flashers
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,158,377
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

INDEX 413
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,285 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,385
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,384
Fluid Level Checks Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Garage Door Opener (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 385 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,335
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,383 Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 10

414 INDEX
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Hazard

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Gauges Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,163 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 118
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,105,278 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289,292 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gross Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 118
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Hitches
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,291 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 79,197,199 HomeLinkt (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 132
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

INDEX 415
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,56 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 117,158,377
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 LATCH
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 59
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71,112
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,166
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,318 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 10

416 INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,374 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,374,377
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 158
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116,163,383 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,126 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,159 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 164 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

INDEX 417
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 164,335
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,230,359 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,386 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338,385
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,385
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,401 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 10

418 INDEX
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,384 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79,197,199
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 79,197,199
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,384 Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,335 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 257
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Port
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,228 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,126 Power
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 126 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 403 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 138
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,347
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

INDEX 419
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Pretensioners Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Programming Transmitters Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Quad Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 305
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 308
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 351,353 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,209 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,199,201 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 205
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Rear Convenience Storage Crates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 10

420 INDEX
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,61 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,160
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,199,201 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 352,385
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36,70 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,388
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,57 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

INDEX 421
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168,172,184,199 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,315
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Shifting Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Steering
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251,347
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,158,377 Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sound Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 10

422 INDEX
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,261,404
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 270 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 158 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Theft System Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257,258
Theft System Disarming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 257,270 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

INDEX 423
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,261 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,224
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,359
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,225,359
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,386
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221,230,359 10

424 INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
(HomeLinkt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Transmitter Programming Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,288
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Warning Lights
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,158,374,377 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . 79,197 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Water
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Unlock, Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

INDEX 425
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119,120,349
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119,349
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118,119
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 365
10

INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key RemovalLocking Doors With The KeySENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationSTEERING WHEEL LOCK - IF EQUIPPED If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering WheelTo Release The Steering Wheel LockAutomatic
Transmission Ignition Interlock SystemSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED To Set the AlarmTo Disarm the SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door LocksREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY To unlock the doorsTo lock the doorsUsing the Panic
AlarmGeneral InformationProgramming Additional TransmittersBattery ReplacementREMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED DOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild Protection Door LockWINDOWS Power Windows Auto Down (Drivers Side Only)
Window Lockout SwitchWIND BUFFETINGOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageAutomatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode - If EquippedCenter Lap BeltsSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder
System (BeltAlert) Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags Event Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Exhaust System
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehicleSafety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorOutside MirrorsExterior Mirrors Folding Feature - If EquippedElectric
Remote-Control MirrorsHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS Manual Seat
AdjustmentFront Seats Manual Seat ReclinersManual Lumbar Support Adjustment - If EquippedAdjustable Head Restraints - Front Seating Positions6 - Way Power Seat Adjuster - Drivers Side OnlyExtended Cab/Crew Cab Rear SeatHeated Seats - If EquippedTO OPEN
AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Interior Lights Battery SaverHeadlamp DelayHeadlights, Parking Lights, Panel LightsDaytime Running Lights (Canada - Standard and US Fleet Vehicles - If Equipped)Lights-on ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedCARGO Light - If Equipped
Multifunction Control LeverWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers Windshield WashersTILT STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The
Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingOVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading LightsCOMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER US/M ButtonRESET Button Global ResetStep Button Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)Distance To Empty (DTE)Trip Odometer
(ODO)Elapsed Time (ET)C/T Button Compass/Temperature DisplayAutomatic Compass CalibrationManual Compass CalibrationTo Put Into a Calibration ModeOutside TemperatureGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian
ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming a Single HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Electrical Outlet Use With Engine OFF
(Battery Fed Configuration)FLOOR CONSOLE - IF EQUIPPED Floor Console FeaturesCENTER STORAGE COMPARTMENT - IF EQUIPPED CUP HOLDERS REAR STORAGE - IF EQUIPPED Rear Convenience Storage CratesPlastic Grocery Bag Retainers REAR
WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster - If EquippedSliding Rear Window - If Equipped TAILGATE Tailgate RemovalTwo Position Tailgate / Upper Load PlatformREAR CARGO AREA UTILITY RAILS SLIDE-IN CAMPERS Camper ApplicationsGeneral Information
Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped With A Cap or Slide-In CampersINSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock Setting
ProcedureRADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast SignalsTwo Types of SignalsElectrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation
Instructions - CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating
Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)SALES CODE RER - MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Satellite RadioOperating Instructions - Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)Clock Setting ProcedureSATELLITE RADIO (RSC) - IF EQUIPPED (RER/REQ/REN RADIOS ONLY) System ActivationElectronic
Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ENS/SID)Selecting Satellite ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - Satellite ModeOperating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If Equipped)Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES) (If
Equipped)REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Radio OperationCD PlayerCOMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE SOUND BOX OPERATION RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Air Conditioning And Heater Operating
TipsOperation Tips Chart STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Manual TransmissionAutomatic TransmissionNormal StartingIf Engine Fails To StartAfter StartingEngine Block Heater - If Equipped AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Brake/Transmission
Interlock SystemAutomatic TransmissionMANUAL TRANSMISSION Recommended Shift SpeedsDownshiftingFOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating Information/PrecautionsShifting Procedure - NV233/243 Transfer Case NV 244
Generation II Transfer Case Operating Information / PrecautionsShifting Procedure - NV 244 Generation II Transfer Case LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL - IF EQUIPPED DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing WaterPARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Rear Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System - If EquippedFour-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake SystemPOWER STEERING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire
PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceSUPPLEMENTAL
TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION - IF EQUIPPED TIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) - IF EQUIPPED Base System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline
Gasoline/Oxygenate BlendsMMT In GasolineMaterials Added To FuelFuel System CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)FLEXIBLE FUEL - IF EQUIPPED E-85 General InformationETHANOL FUEL (E-85)Fuel RequirementsSelection
Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles (E-85) and Gasoline VehiclesStartingCruising RangeReplacement PartsMaintenanceVEHICLE LOADING Certification LabelCurb WeightLoadingTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing
Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsSNOWPLOW Snowplow UsageRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational Towing 2WD ModelsRecreational Towing 4WD ModelsEQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION PLATE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ADDING FUEL CHANGING A FLAT TIRE Jack LocationRemoving The Spare TireTire Changing ProcedureJUMP STARTING FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE EMERGENCY TOW
HOOKS - IF EQUIPPED TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Four-Wheel Drive VehiclesTwo-Wheel Drive VehiclesMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4.7L ENGINE COMPARTMENT ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler
Cap MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterDrive Belts - Check Condition and TensionSpark PlugsEngine Air Cleaner FilterEngine
Fuel FilterCatalytic ConverterMaintenance Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenancePower Steering - Fluid CheckFront Suspension Ball JointsDrive Shaft Constant Velocity JointsBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesWindshield WashersExhaust SystemCooling System
Emission Related ComponentsBrake SystemClutch Hydraulic SystemManual TransmissionAutomatic TransmissionTransfer CaseAxlesAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionFUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER) VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT
LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn LightsRear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stoplamp, and Turn Signal Bulbs - ReplacementCenter High-Mounted Stoplamp And Cargo LampLicense LampsFog LampsFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR
OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In Canada
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX

2008 Dakota

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Dakota

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Dakota

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What safety features are discussed in the manual?

What safety features are discussed in the manual?

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

m Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

Ignition Switch Positions

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the

WARNING! Manual Transmission—If Equipped

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also NOTE:

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Replacement Keys authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

General Information If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

3. Release both buttons at the same time. Horn Chirp Programming

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 Manual Door Locks

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Power Door Locks

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

WINDOWS windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

Power Window Switch

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com